Home

Altivar 71 Adjustable Speed Drive Programming Manual

Contents

1. Interm point Y 4 Min value Interm 100 point X 0 t t 0 Interm point a P d 100 Max value 100 20 mA or10V 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A Al assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al1 in order to check for example problems for compatibility 2 AH Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 100 Positive voltage input negative values are interpreted as zero the input is unidirectional O Voltage n10U Positive and negative voltage input the input is bidirectional 2 min value 0 to 10 0 V OV 0 to 10 0 V Ll Al1 max value L filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering L Interm point X 0 to 10096 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Al1 min value UIL1 100 corresponds Al1 max value UIH1 Interm point Y 0 to 10076 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 94 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co In
2. See the assignment conditions on page 124 To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds 16 preset speeds No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 To obtain 16 speeds you must also configure 2 4 and 8 speeds 1755855 12 2009 147 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 2 1 Preset speed 3 1 Preset speed 4 1 Preset speed 5 1 Preset speed 6 1 Preset speed 7 1 Preset speed 8 1 Preset speed 9 1 Preset speed 10 1 Preset speed 11 1 Preset speed 12 1 Preset speed 13 1 Preset speed 14 1 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 0 109M The appearance of these Preset speed x SPx parameters is determined by the number of speeds configured 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 148 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn speed Two types of operation are available 1 Use of sing
3. Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 222 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Motor thermal protection Function Thermal protection by calculating the 121 Note The memory of the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is switched off The power off time is used to recalculate the thermal state the next time the drive is switched on Naturally cooled motors The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency Force cooled motors Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered regardless of the motor frequency Trip time in seconds 4 1Hz 3Hz 5Hz 109 20 Hz 50 Hz 10 000 1 000 100 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 1 4 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Motor current ItH 1755855 12 2009 223 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor protect type poe redial uet O No nO No protection Self cooled ACL For self cooled motors Force cool FCL For force cooled motors Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls
4. Motoring torque Yes lim tLIM YES Torque Q limitation via LI parameter O So Gen torque lim 7 o Limitation value Analog limit act tLC Lowest value taken into account 5 Yes Torque YES limitation via O AL analog input IN ae a 9 Encoder PG Encoder A 4 No nO LI Torque ref assign tAA 1755855 12 2009 185 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Torque limit activ No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Function always active LH O See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active 1 1 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Selection of units for the Motoring torque lim and torque lim tLIG parameters 0 196 0 1 unit 0 1 O 1 1 unit 1 Motoring torque lim 1 Ene The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in motor mode as a 6 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter Gen
5. 9oooo osS SBocc e999 c9 o pq ove IS 2 ae oss x dt On m mmm r e so 52 52 159 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Frequency 4 Brake logic control vertical or horizontal movement in closed loop mode 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn o 9 s Se eS a a i a e a Oe Pea es ee uonoefu L oc e 5 c oc o 5 gt 9 o o 9 cs LL a To o oc g 5 o 2 E 9 o9 DN M 3 1 4 BL E 5 ara EN enbJo J 9 L e L rE NITE DE S MIA OS S E DP 2 2 BL xn J FW pe 5 EE o f pets or p 55 c 5 23 9 Dogo o o rz c Ep cs 5 o E ot o Fos c 5 oO G Eo Or 9 202 8 5 9 x G o oa ox Xa 9 se 9 o X 2 Foote w gt F TESTS
6. A load Mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without tripping fault In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop Fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed at the time the fault occurred as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 1755855 12 2009 237 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 DB res protection O No nO No braking resistor protection thereby preventing access to the other function
7. 242 nLH1 242 ntRB 242 nor 42 69 nOrS 74 nL5 197 1 242 242 nflAd 242 242 5 242 D D D o 1 1 Es o 1 3 EX o 1 o a E o 1 o 1 lt 1 D m D O1 N 284 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 qHOMSSVd 514 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 21 ug 7 INOILVOINNININOD 61 242 242 242 774 LNSWADVNVWN LINY 81 Lo N 224 4 LONN NOILVOr1adv 7 11 141 GNVINOD 901 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM v t 335 SoNILL3S dns NIHOLINOIN 2 11 ul 5 1916 A1dMIS L H Code Index of parameter codes nA B nflA T nA B nPr nrd n5L n5P n5P5 n5t ole alJ al 005 alb DLL OHL ULL DPL OPr 5 PAH PAL PAS PAU PEr PES PF PFr PGA PG PHS PHr PIE 285 This document provided by Barr Thor
8. 150 PID prop gain Proportional gain 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 177 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID integral gain 0 01 to 100 Integral gain PID derivative gain 100 Derivative gain PID ramp 1 0 to 99 9 s 0s PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 and vice versa PID correct reverse No nO No nO O Yes YES Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive Example pressure control with a compressor If PIC 2 YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive Example temperature control using a cooling fan 1 500 to 500 or 1600 0 Hz Min PID output to 1600 according to rating Minimum value of regulator output in Hz 0 to 500 or 1600 Max PID output according to rating Maximum va
9. 1755855 12 2009 43 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Parameters that can be changed during operation or when stopped Name Description Factory setting LI Mot therm current 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 rating Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate 2 Acceleration 0 1 to 999 9 s 3 06 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 42 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 0 1 to 999 9 s 3 0s 1 Deceleration Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 42 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 1 Low speed Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set between 0 and High speed HSP High speed 5042 Motor frequency at maximum reference can be set between Low speed LSP and Max frequency tFr The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 44 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIV
10. 774 LNSWADVNVWN LINY 81 N i amp ag a C SES N NI N 4 LONN NOILVOr1adv 7 11 e Read t N 141 GNVINOD 901 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM v t 335 SoNILL3S dns DNIHOLINOW 2 11 ul 5 LH V LS A1dMIS 1201 Code E5g ESN ESS ESE 5 EEd EEde EEd3 EEH EEL EEU EEr ELL EUn EUP EUS l Ue ug us Ubr ure UC b UCP UFr U IHI U UILI U ILe UILY 291 1755855 12 2009 Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Index of parameter codes Page 1 qHOMSSVd 514 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 21 ug 7 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN LINY 81 a N N N N N 4 nN 4 LONN NOILLVOMddvV 7 11 N c 141 GNVINOD 901 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 c 10H1NOO HOLOM v t 335 SoNILL3S dns NIHOLINOIN 2 11 ul 5 1915 ATdINIS 1201 Code
11. AO2 min Output 010 10 0 V OV The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U AO2 max Output 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U Scaling AO2 min 0 to 100 0 0 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO2 max 0 to 100 0 100 0 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO2 Filter 0 to 10 00 s Os Interference filtering 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range AO3 assignment No nO Same assignments as 1 without dO 1 dO1 AO3 Type Current 0A O Voltage 10U Voltage output O Current 0A Current output O Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output AO3 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AOSt Current 0A AO3 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Current 0A AO3 min Output 0to 10 0 V OV The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U AO3 max Output Oto 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter be accessed if AO3 Type
12. 1 1 SIMPLY START RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 2 MONITORING MAIN MENU 1 3 SETTINGS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot freq 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 3 OPEN SAVE AS Code lt lt gt gt Quick With integrated display terminal Power up 68 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC The parameters in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions Auto tuning tUn page 70 which may cause the motor to start up e Parameters containing the sign in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped Name Description Adjustment range bFr i Standard mot freq 50Hz IEC 50 5 50Hz IEC 50 IEC EU 60Hz NEMA 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters High speed page 44 Freq threshold Ftd page 67 Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS and Max frequency tFr g Rated motor power A to drive Eo to drive The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 According to drive According to
13. Uns UDH I UOHe UOHGW 1 UOL e UOP UPL UrES USb us 151 USP USE 1755855 12 2009 292 Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co ATV71_programming_manual_EN_ 1755855 07 1755854 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com
14. gt gt Quick Code lt lt Note To select a parameter Turn the navigation button to scroll vertically To modify a parameter Use the lt lt and gt gt keys F2 and F3 to scroll horizontally and select the digit to be modified the selected digit changes to white on a black background Turn the navigation button to modify the digit To cancel the modification Press ESC To save the modification Press the navigation button ENT 24 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal Quick navigation If the Quick function is displayed above the F4 key you can gain quick access to a parameter from any screen Example RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 5 0Hz IEC 0 37 kW 0 5 HP 206 V 1 0A 50 0 Hz Standard mot freq Rated motor power Rated motor volt Rated mot current Rated motor freq Press F4 to access the Quick screen which contains 4 selection options RDY Term 0 00 2 0A QUICK NAVIGATION RETURN TO MAIN MENU ENT HOME Return to MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU Be BP DIRECT ACCESS TO 2 ACCESS LEVEL 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS GOTO MULTIPOINT SCREEN See page 266 3 OPEN SAVE AS DIRECT ACCESS TO Opens the direct access window which will contain the text 1 The function keys lt lt a
15. 1 I Weight sensor signal Point 2x 100 LP2 Zero load Point 1y CP1 4 This curve can represent a weight sensor on an elevator winch where zero load on the motor occurs when the load in the cabin is not zero 166 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting T Weight sensor ass Pe Function can be accessed if brake logic control is assigned see page 161 If Weight sensor ass PES is not No nO Movement type bSt page 161 is forced to Hoisting UEr No nO Function inactive 11 A1 Analog input AI2 12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network Al AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via Al net channel AIC1 page 98 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 244 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result
16. 250 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 13 USER MENU USr This menu contains the parameters selected in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu on page 261 With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS RDY Tem 0 00 1 11 IDENTIFICATION MAIN MENU ENT 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 13 USER MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 3 OPEN SAVE AS With integrated display terminal Power up 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 251 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD PLC This menu can only be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted Please refer to the documentation specific to this card With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS MAIN MENU ENT 1 13 USER MENU ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 2 ACCESS LEVE
17. RDY Term 0 00 2 0A Term 0 00 2 0A SET1 Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration T Acceleration 2 9 51 S Deceleration 2 Begin Acc round 3 i 999 9 With the integrated display terminal Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear 1755855 12 2009 199 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SET 2 The parameter be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 SET 3 The parameter can be accessed if 3 parameter sets is not No and if at least 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 Ee Note We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and a check is made to ensure that it has been performed correctly Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching Interdependencies between parameters must be respected even between different sets Example The highest Low speed LSP must be below the lowest High speed HSP 200 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS CON
18. Reduces energy consumption by improving the electric power current ratio ENA prop gain This setting is used to achieve a compromise between the reduced energy consumption and or line current fluctuations and the mechanical stress to which the rod is subject Energy is saved by reducing current fluctuations and increasing the current while retaining the same average speed ENA integral gain This setting is used to smooth the DC bus voltage Start up the machine with a low integral and proportional gain proportional 25 and integral 10 in order to avoid an overvoltage trip in the absence of a braking resistor See if these settings are suitable Recommended adjustments to be made during operation To eliminate the braking resistor and therefore the increase in the DC bus voltage Display the machine speed on the graphic display terminal Reduce the integral gain value until the machine speed drops When this point is reached increase the integral gain until the machine speed stabilizes Use the graphic display terminal or an oscilloscope to check that the DC bus voltage is stable To save energy Reducing the proportional gain gradually may increase energy savings by reducing the maximum value of the line current but it will increase speed variations and therefore mechanical stress The aim is to identify settings that will enable energy to be saved and minimize mechanical stress When reducing the proportional gain it
19. The number of pulses revolution If a fault is detected the drive locks in Encoder fault EnF fault mode 1755855 12 2009 101 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Encoder usage The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted No nO Function inactive In this case the other parameters cannot be accessed Fdbk monit SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only O Spd fdk reg rEG The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed loop operation Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt SVC V UUC the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed This configuration is not accessible for other Motor control type Ctt values O Speed ref PGr The encoder provides a reference Can only be selected with an incremental encoder card Number of pulses 100 105000 1624 Number of pulses per encoder revolution The parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted 1 Reference type Encoder EnC The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr O Encoder EnC Use of an
20. If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 244 the virtual input remains fixed at the last i Summing ref 3 No nO Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Subtract ref 2 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Frib Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Subtract ref 3 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Multiplier ref 2 No nO Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above A Multiplier ref 3 No nO Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above 136 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 Ramp type Linear LIn O Linear Lin S ramp S O U ramp U O Customiz
21. LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1 the traverse control operating time is reset to zero along with Decrease ref speed dtF 1755855 12 2009 211 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Evacuation function The evacuation function is designed for elevator applications It is only accessible for ATV71eeeN4 380 480 V drives up to ATV71eD75N4 ATV71eeeY 500 690 V drives up to ATV71eD90Y When an elevator is stuck between 2 floors due to a power outage it must be possible to evacuate its occupants within a reasonable period of time This function requires an emergency power supply to be connected to the drive This power supply is at a reduced voltage and only allows a derated operating mode at reduced speed but with full torque The function requires One logic input to control evacuation operation Reduction of the voltage monitoring threshold An appropriate low speed reference Following a power outage the drive can restart without going into Undervoltage USF fault mode if the corresponding logic input is at 1 at the same time CAUTION This input must not be at 1 when the drive is powered from the line supply To ensure this and also avoid any short circuits supply changeover contactors must be used Set th
22. Oo No nO Not assigned I motor OCr Current in the motor between 0 and 2 In In rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Motor freq OFr Output frequency from 0 to Max frequency tFr Ramp out OrP From 0 to Max frequency tFr Motor torq tra Motor torque between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Sign torque Sta Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign corresponds to the motor mode and the sign to the generator mode braking sign ramp OrS Signed ramp output between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr PID ref OPS PID regulator reference between Min PID reference PIP1 and Max PID reference PIP2 PID feedback OPF PID regulator feedback between Min PID feedback PIF1 and Max PID feedback PIF2 PID error OPE PID regulator error between 5 and 5 of Max PID feedback PIF2 Min PID feedback PIF1 PID Output OPI PID regulator output between Low speed LSP and High speed HSP Mot power OPr Motor power between 0 and 2 5 times Rated motor power nPr Mot thermal tHr Motor thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Drv thermal tHd Drive thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Torque 4Q tqMS Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torqu
23. Synchronous motor Name Description 2 RirS Cold state stator resistance per winding in read only mode This is the drive factory setting or the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 0 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Nominal freq sync Motor frequency at rated speed in Hz calculated by the drive rated motor frequency in read only mode 76 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Selecting the encoder Follow the recommendations in the catalog and the Installation Manual Name Description Adjustment range 1 Encoder type AABB AAbb The parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted 1 To be configured in accordance with the type of card and encoder used AABB AAbb For signals A B B O AB Ab For signals A B A A For signal A Value cannot be accessed if Encoder usage EnU page 79 Spd fdk reg rEG 100 to 5000 1 Number of pulses Number of pulses per encoder revolution The parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted 1 1 The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted and the availabl
24. The parameter can be accessed if PID feedback ass PIF Network AI AIU1 This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O menu O No n0 Not assigned O Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus O CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted Min PID feedback in 100 Value for minimum feedback Adjustment range from 0 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Max PID feedback 1 1000 Value for maximum feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF 1 to 32767 2 Min PID reference 1 9 Minimum process value Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID reference 2 2 Max PID reference 0 Maximum process value Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Act internal PID ref Internal PID regulator reference O No nO The PID regulator reference is given by Fr1 or Frib with summing subtraction multiplication functions see the diagram on page 118 Yes YES PID regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI Internal PID ref Internal PID regulator reference This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 0 01 to 100 1 900
25. 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 4 PASSWORD COd With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD Unlocked 5 LANGUAGE Code With integrated display terminal Power up m Displays the state of the drive Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration Example with graphic display terminal RUN Term 450 00Hz 80A RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A 4 PASSWORD PIN code 1 Status E Unlocked PIN code 1 9520 PIN code 2 Unlocked Upload rights Permitted Download rights Unlock drv Min Unlocked Max 9999 Code lt lt gt gt Quick The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to unlocked OFF no password or when the correct code has been entered All menus are visible Before protecting the configuration with an access code you must Define the Upload rights ULr and Download rights dLr Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a safe place where you will always be able to find it The drive has 2 access codes enabling 2 access levels to be set up PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product
26. Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 108 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Configuration of analog outputs Minimum and maximum values output values The minimum output value in volts or mA corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds to its upper limit The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Parameter assigned Parameter assigned A 4 Upper limit Upper limit Lower Current or Lower Current or imit voltage imi Min Output Max Output 20 mA Een Max Output Min Output 20 mA 42 AOLx or or r AOHx or AOLx or or P UOLx UOHx 10V UOHx UOLx 10V Outputs AO2 and AO3 configured as bipolar outputs strongly recommended for signed parameters The min Output UOLx and max Output UOHx parameters are absolute values although they function symmetrically In the case of bipolar outputs always set the maximum value higher than the minimum value The max Output UOHx corresponds to the upper limit of the assigned parameter
27. DC injection dCI or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 0 DC injection time 2 ane Cae Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only The parameter can be accessed if Stop type Stt DC injection 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 3 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 142 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Auto DC injection Pree NES Automatic current injection on stopping at the end of the ramp L1 No nO No injection O Yes YES Adjustable injection time O Continuous Ct Continuous standstill injection Warning there is an interlock between this function and Motor fluxing FLU page 154 If Motor fluxing FLU Continuous FCt Auto DC injection Adc must be No nO Note This parameter gives ri
28. Deadband 0 bnS0 Frequency This operation is the same as Standard 054 except that in the following cases at zero reference the frequency 0 The signal is less than Min value which is greater than 0 example 1 V on a 2 10 V input signal is greater than Min value which is greater than Max value example 11 V on a 10 0 V input If the input range is configured as bidirectional operation remains identical to Standard bSd This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account for analog inputs and Pulse input only In the case of the PID regulator this is the PID output reference The limits are set by the Low speed LSP and High speed HSP parameters page 44 92 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Delinearization For analog inputs only The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input output curve of this input For range 0 100 Reference i Interm point Y 4 0 Min value Interm point Max value 096 X 100 20 mA or 10 V Current or voltage input Note For Interm point X 0 corresponds to Min value and 100 to Max value For range 100 gt 100 Current or voltage input Reference A 10096
29. Freewheel nSt O Ramp stop rMP O Fast stop FSt O Freewheel nSt When the assigned input changes to 0 the stop is controlled in accordance with the selected type Restarting is only authorized for the other operating direction once the motor has stopped If the two inputs Stop FW limit sw LAF and Stop RV limit sw LAr are assigned and at state 0 restarting will be impossible The parameter can be accessed if Stop FW limit sw LAF or Stop RV limit sw LAr is assigned 156 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Brake logic control Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications and for unbalanced machines Principle Vertical hoisting movement Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing in order to hold the load start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged Horizontal movement Synchronize brake release with the build up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping to prevent jolting Recommended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of control of the loa
30. Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Begin Acc round Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as of the Acceleration ACC Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS End Acc round 1 10 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round tA1 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 1 0 to 100 10 2 Begin Dec round Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS End Dec round o Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 10 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 138 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric C
31. PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm Al2 Al 4 20 AP2 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 67 Th drv att tAd Drive thermal state attained Rope slack rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config parameter rSd page 172 High tq att ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 66 Low tq att 1 Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd 1 page 66 Forward MFrd Motor in forward rotation Reverse MrrS Motor in reverse rotation Th mot att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 53 Motor 3 thermal state attained Neg Torque AtS Negative torque braking Cnfg 0 act CnF0 Configuration 0 active Cnfg 1 act CnF1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active DC charged dbL DC bus charging In braking brS Drive braking P removed PRM Drive locked by Power removal input Fr met alar FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 67 I present MCP Motor current present Limit sw att LSA Limit switch attained Load alarm dLdA Load variation detection see page 237 Alarm Grp 1 AGI Alarm gro
32. Preset references via logic inputs rP2 rP3 rP4 n accordance with the configuration of Act internal PID ref PII pages 177 Internal reference or Reference A Fr1 or Frib see page 119 Combination table for preset PID references LI Pr4 LI Pr2 Pr2 nO Reference rPI or A 0 or A 0 1 rP2 1 0 rP3 1 1 rP4 A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process 1755855 12 2009 173 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Scaling of feedback and references PIF1 PIF2 parameters Can be used to scale the PID feedback sensor range This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters PIP1 PIP2 parameters Can be used to scale the adjustment range i e the reference The adjustment range MUST lie within the sensor range The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32767 To facilitate installation we recommend using values as close as possible to this maximum level while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values Example see graph below Adjustment of the volume in a tank between 6 m and 15 m Sensor used 4 20 mA 4 5 m for 4 mA 20 m for 20 mA with the result that PIF1 4500 and PIF2 20000 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m with the result that PIP1 6000 min reference and PIP2 15000 max reference Exampl
33. The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Rated linear speed in meters second 50 to 200 100 LI Stop corrector The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate for example a non linear ramp 1755855 12 2009 197 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu on page 54 can be selected and 2 or different values assigned These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits This switching can be performed during operation motor running It can also be controlled on the basis of one or two frequency thresholds whereby each threshold acts as a logic input 0 threshold not reached 1 threshold reached Values 1 Values 2 Values 3 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 P
34. UEr Driving load movement hoisting winch for example If Weight sensor ass PES page 167 is not No nO Movement type bSt is forced to Hoisting UEr m Brake contact No nO If the brake has a monitoring contact closed for released brake No nO Function inactive LI L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 Brake impulse FM The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 167 and if Movement type bSt Hoisting UEr No nO The motor torque is given in the required operating direction at current Ibr O Yes YES The motor torque is always Forward check that this direction corresponds to ascending at current Ibr 2 IBR 210 The torque is in the required direction at current Ibr for Forward and Ird for Reverse for certain specific applications Brake release FW 1 0 to 1 32 In 2 Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 167 1 0 to 1 32 In 2 0 Brake release Rev Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement The parameter be accessed if Brake impulse 2 IBR 216 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated
35. UHxorPFr 30 00 kHz UHx or PFr ULxorPIL 30 00 kHz For bidirectional inputs the min and max are relative to the absolute value for example 2 to 8 V Negative min value of Pulse input Reference A 10095 Frequency input 30 00 RP min 0 RP max value 30 00 kHz value PFr kHz PIL Range output values For analog inputs only This parameter is used to configure the reference range to 0 510094 or 100 100 in order to obtain a bidirectional output from a unidirectional input Heterence Reference A 10076 pose eg 100 Current voltage Min v lu j voltage E 0 input T T t Min value Max value 20 mA Max value 20 Range 0 100 or 10 V or 10 V 100 M Range 100 gt 100 1755855 12 2009 91 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Ll Reference template Standard bSd O Standard 650 Frequency At zero reference the frequency LSP A HSP LSP 100 gt Reference O Pedestal bLS Frequency At reference 0 to LSP the frequency LSP Reference 100 Deadband bns Frequency At reference 0 to LSP the frequency 0 HSP Reference
36. res amp r3 E rdd 3H s 235 EL r AP E rLtb cs Ig ESS Ek N ile iG D rFr rFE EX r IL D D N r In s no rP 25 m Pg E 225 lo1 O1 B 00 E o rPH 25 PE E 4 per 4 PE D A N D l E N N PO p 5 rPE rr5 r 5H 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 287 Index of parameter codes Code Page p 5 o z 2 5 5 S g E 51815 p tc O E e Z lt lt 2 lt 2 z m 8 o E lt gt a 7 a 5 z lt 2 tc gt z E o S E E Ero S pem 1 E 1 5 1 1 S 1 1 2 S 1 qi zu B Su Zo i c T
37. 1 C201 1 C301 1 C401 1 CD01 LI3 C102 C202 C302 C402 CD02 Ll4 C103 C203 C303 C403 CD03 LI5 C104 C204 C304 C404 CD04 LI6 C105 C205 C305 C405 CD05 LI7 C106 C206 C306 C406 CD06 LI8 C107 C207 C307 C407 CD07 19 108 208 C308 C408 CD08 110 109 209 C309 C409 CD09 111 110 210 C310 C410 CD10 1112 111 211 C311 C411 CD11 LI13 C112 C212 C312 C412 CD12 1114 113 213 C313 C413 CD13 C114 C214 C314 C414 CD14 z C115 C215 C315 C415 CD15 1 If 2 3 wire control tCC page 89 3 wire 3C LI2 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 123 1 6 COMMAND CtL Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit LH LI1 to LI6 116 Drive with or without option L17 LI7 to LI10 L110 With VW3A3201 logic I O card 111 LI1 1 to 1114 L114 With VW3A3202 extended card C101 C101 to C110 C110 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO configuration C111 C111 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration C201 C201 to C210 C210 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO configuration C211 C211 to C215 C215 With integrated C
38. Config 1 CFG1 and Config 2 CFG2 2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST Selection of menus to be loaded All ALL All parameters O Drive menu drM The 1 DRIVE MENU menu without 1 9 COMMUNICATION and 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD In the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Return std name page 262 returns to No O Settings SEt The 1 3 SETTINGS menu without the IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP and Mot therm current ItH parameters O Motor param MOt motor parameters see list below The following selections can only be accessed if Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl O Comm menu COM The 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu without either Scan In1 address nMA1 to Scan In8 address 8 or Scan Out1 address nCA1 to Scan Out8 address nCA8 Prog card menu PLC the 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD menu O Monitor config MOn the 6 MONITORING CONFIG menu O Display config 015 the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu See the multiple selection procedure on page 30 for the integrated display terminal and page 21 for the graphic display terminal Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty A Goto FACTORY SETTINGS It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected With the integrated display terminal No Yes The parameter changes back to nO automatically as
39. ECF EnF SOF SPF and tnF faults can also be reset remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 220 AnF EnF InFA InFb SOF SPF and tnF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 231 Name Probable cause Remedy Fault Al2 input Non conforming signal on analog input Check the wiring of analog input AI2 and the value of the Al2 signal Load slipping The encoder speed feedback does not match the reference Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add a braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the encoder s mechanical coupling and its wiring If the torque control function is used see Note on page 184 DBR overload The braking resistor is under excessive stress Check the size of the resistor and wait for it to cool down Check the DB Resistor Power brP and DB Resistor value brU parameters page 238 Brake feedback The brake feedback contact does not match the brake logic control The brake does not stop the motor quickly enough detected by measuring the speed on the Pulse input input Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control circui Check the mechanical state of the brake Check the brake linings DB unit sh Circuit Short circuit output from braking unit Braking unit not connected Check th
40. EnA Yes YES Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IE ENA integral gain 0 9202393 The parameter be accessed if ENA system EnA Yes YES rRP Reduction ratio 1 TOI The parameter be accessed if ENA system EnA Yes YES 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 81 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range OF Sinus filter No nO O No nO No sinus filter O Yes YES Use of a sinus filter to limit overvoltages on the motor and reduce the ground fault leakage current Sinus filter OF is forced to No nO on 71 037 3 and 71 075 4 and on all ATV71eeeeY Ee Note The settings for Current Limitation CLI and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 61 must be made once Sinus filter OFI has been set to Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 71 has been set to V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 This is due to the fact that for certain ratings this configuration will result in a reduced factory setting 1 36 In for current limitations YES CAUTION If Sinus filter Yes YES Motor control type Ctt page 71 must be V F 2pts UF2 V F 5pts UF5 or
41. Multiplier ref 3 lt E _ speed around PID REGULATOR 12197 Ramps PID not assigned Es o speed 5 5 CC DEC i X FrH rFr no IX Ref 2 channel sp AC2 DE2 5 Low speed c 5 Ft a Key Oo Forced local Ref 2 Switching Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment Instructions Fri SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 MA2 MA3 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 terminals Fr2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card and speed Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu 118 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Reference channel for Not separ SIM Separate SEP and I O profile IO configurations PID configured with PID references at the terminals Ref 1B switching F LUE Ref 1 channel ov
42. Rated motor speed nSP exceeds 65535 rpm Ee Note 1 Changing rpm increment InSP will restore Rated motor speed nSP to its factory setting Note 2 For ATV71eeeY range rpm increment InSP is fixed to 1 0 to 96000 rpm According to drive rating _1 Rated motor speed The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn Rated motor speed given on the nameplate Adjustable between 0 and 65535 rpm if rpm increment INSP x1 rpm 1 or between 0 00 and 96 00 krpm if rom increment INSP x10 rpm 10 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 65 53 or 96 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x 100 slip as a 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in Hz 60 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 1755855 12 2009 69 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description 1 Max frequency 10 to 1600 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is l
43. The parameter can be accessed if the Controller Inside card has been inserted and depending on its configuration please consult the specific documentation Modbus add Com C OFF Modbus address of the communication card OFF to 247 The parameter can be accessed if a communication card has been inserted and depending on its configuration please consult the specific documentation Modbus baud rate 19 2 kbps 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 kbps on the integrated display terminal 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display terminal Modbus format 801 8E1 8n1 8n2 Modbus time out 0 1 to 30s CANopen address OFF to 127 CANopen bit rate 125 kbps 50 125 250 500 kbps 1 Mbps Error code Read only parameter cannot be modified 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 243 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 See the specific documentation for the card used LI Forced local assign L1 No nO Function inactive O LI1 Li1 to LI6 116 L1 LI7 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted O LH 1 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1 Forced local assign FLO is forced to No
44. This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS RUN Term 1250A 50 00 2 Term 1250 450 00Hz Selection of source configuration 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT Config Source Config source Macro Conf Macro Conf PARAMETER GROUP LIST Config 1 Config 2 Goto FACTORY SETTINGS Save config H No RUN Term 1250A 50 00Hz Selection of the menus to be ENT PARAMETER GROUP LIST replaced Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty RUN Term 1250A 50 00 2 Command to return to factory Goto FACTORY SETTINGS settings ENT We PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT validate Term VEIT es 00Hz E FACTORY S This window appears if no group of parameters is selected First select the parameter group s Press ENT or ESC to continue ENT RUN Term 1250 50 00Hz Save config 1755855 12 2009 249 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS 1 Config Source Choice of source configuration L1 Inl Factory configuration return to selected macro configuration O Config 1 CFG1 O Config 2 CFG2 If the configuration switching function is configured it will not be possible to access
45. UnderV prevention StP is not No nO The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value g Max stop time 0 01 to 60 00 s 1 00 s Ramp time if UnderV prevention StP Ramp stop rMP DC bus maintain tm 00199988 DC bus maintain time if UnderV prevention StP DC Maintain MMS 3 IGBT test O No nO No test O Yes YES The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent These tests cause a slight delay a few ms In the event of a fault the drive will lock The following faults can be detected Drive output short circuit terminals U V W SCF display IGBT faulty xtF where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned IGBT short circuited x2F where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 229 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J 12 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if AI2 min value CrL2 page 95 is not greater than 3 mA or if Al2 Type Al2t page 95 Voltage 10U Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop St
46. as22Hs Key 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 160 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting CE C Brake assignment iNe no cge Note If the brake is assigned only a ramp stop is possible Check the Type of stop Stt page 141 Brake logic control can only be assigned if Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVC V SVC I CUC or FVC FUC or if Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 for ATV71eeeN4 from 90 kW and for ATV71eeeM3X from 55 kW Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected dO1 dO1 Analog output 1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO Movement type MEM O Traveling HOr Resistive load movement translational motion of overhead crane for example Note If Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 for ATV71eeeN4 from 90 kW and for ATV71eeeM3X from 55 kW Movement type 051 is forced to Traveling HOr O Hoisting
47. b5t 161 bUb 238 CCFL 41 CS 126 Ed 126 Cde 126 41 CFPS 51 53 CHA 199 CHAS 199 LHLF 125 EHTI 204 Cle 61 188 EL 61 82 188 LLL 232 172 CLS 197 CaF 1 204 2 204 LnF5 51 53 256 COd2 256 1755855 12 2009 279 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Index of parameter codes Code Page d 2 o e E o z z o 2 E E B a E cc oO E E z E lt x z 5 n gt lt x o m o o a lt 9 gt E o z 4 z gt o 4 gt E E z z Em a E in a at qi o i otc zu gu Su Zo 4 fre enn in 5 st ou n gt e ou A qu an E un Eu ES m Er Eu Et aS 22 COF i2 COL 232 COP 127 Cor 172 EPI 167 167 95 CrHd 96 ErHH 97 Crle2 95 LrL3 96 Crly 97 CSE 256 66 CEE 136 136 dHF 196 dAL 196 dAr 196 dH5 192 dbn 184 dbP 184 Jb5 192 dLF 59 141 240 dL 142 214 55 139 152 dEL 44 55 dL b 237 dL d 237 dlr 256 dl 108 ld 108 dO 108 280 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 17558
48. gt Frequency 3 FrS O Sync mot SYn For synchronous permanent magnet motors with sinusoidal electromotive force only This selection is prohibited with ATV71eeeeY 500 to 690 V This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible and the synchronous motor parameters accessible 1755855 12 2009 71 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Code Name Description ug g Eli EN Eli EN Elli EN Eli EN Eli EM 00 V F profile setting UF5 U1 V F profile setting F1 V F profile setting U2 V F profile setting F2 V F profile setting U3 V F profile setting F3 V F profile setting U4 V F profile setting F4 V F profile setting U5 V F profile setting F5 V F profile setting The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c The parameter can be accessed if Motor c Adjustment range 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating Factory setting 0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating The parameter can be access
49. speed HLS Acceleration is then maintained up to this value Slowdown prior to slowing down frequency The final part of the path is identical to that of the standar B Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Half floor speed Activation and adjustment of the half floor function This function has priority over all speed reference functions preset speeds for example with the exception of those generated via fault monitoring fallback speed for example O No nO Function inactive O 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Activation of the function by adjusting the motor frequency to be reached prior to slowing down 1755855 12 2009 213 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Direct power supply via DC bus This function is not accessible for ATV71HeeeS6X gt and for ATV71HeeeY gt 110 kW 150 HP HHP range Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power and voltage as well as a suitably dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor Consult Schneider Electric for information about specifying these components The direct power supply via DC bus function can be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay or a logic input on the drive Example circuit using R2 relay Contactor power supply Y A1 A2 Ay i oo o lt
50. torque lim 1 SUR BED 1006 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter Torque increment No nO 1 Torque ref assign If the function is assigned the limitation varies between 0 and 300 of the rated torque on the basis of the 0 to 100 signal applied to the assigned input Examples 12 mA on 4 20 mA input results in limitation to 150 of the rated torque 2 5 10 V input results in 75 of the rated torque O No nO Not assigned function inactive Al A to 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted O Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network Al AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via Al net channel AIC1 page 98 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 244 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu o Parameter th
51. 10 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 0 to 999 9 s 1 Torque ctrl time out Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of a fault or alarm 2 Torq ctrl fault mgt Alarm ALrM Response of drive once time Torque ctrl time out rtO has elapsed O Alarm ALrM O Fault FLt Fault with freewheel stop Ee Note If the motor is equipped with an encoder assigned to speed feedback the torque control function will trigger a Load slipping AnF fault One of the following solutions should be applied Set Load slip detection Sdd page 233 No nO Set both Positive deadband dbP and Negative deadband dbn to a value less than 1096 of the rated motor frequency Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 184 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Torque limitation There are two types of torque limitation With a value that is fixed by a parameter With a value that is set by an analog input Al pulse or encoder If both types are enabled the lowest value is taken into account The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus Torque limit activ tLA
52. 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS 1 13 USER MENU USr 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD PLC 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD COd 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG MULTIPOINT SCREEN Maintenance Faults Causes Remedies User settings tables Index of functions Index of parameter codes 116 129 215 239 243 245 246 249 250 251 253 255 259 264 265 266 272 274 275 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Before you begin Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure on this drive A DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE Read and understand the Installation Manual before installing or operating the ATV71 drive Installation adjustment repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel The user is responsible for compliance with all international and national electrical standards in force concerning protective grounding of all equipment Many parts of this variable speed drive including the printed circuit boards operate at the line voltage DO NOT TOUCH Use only electrically insulated tools DO NOT touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present DO NOT short across terminals PA and PC or across the DC bus capacitors Install and close all the covers before applying po
53. 14 109 36 yd 76 55 yd 49 21yd 114 83yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU15N4 1 5 2 ES 14 109 36 yd 76 55 49 21yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU22N4 22 3 1 5 14 120 30yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU30N4 3 1 5 14 120 30 yd 71 08 yd 49 21yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU40N4 4 5 14 120 30 yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83 92 96 yd 71 08 yd 71 055 4 5 5 7 5 2 5 14 131 23 4 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83yd 9296yd 71 08 yd 71 075 4 75 10 2 5 14 131 28yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83yd 9296yd 71 08 ATV7T1HD11N4A 11 15 6 10 125 77 yd 65 62yd 49 21 109 36 yd 82 02yd 60 15 yd ATV71HD15N4 15 20 10 8 114 83 yd 65 62yd 43 74yd 109 36 yd 76 55 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD18N4 18 5 25 10 8 125 77 yd 65 62yd 38 28 164 04 yd 82 02 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD22N4 22 30 16 6 164 04 65 62yd 43 74 164 04 yd 76 55yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD30N4 30 40 25 4 164 04 60 15 yd 38 28yd 164 04 yd 76 55yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD37N4 37 50 35 5 218 72yd 71 08yd 54 68yd 164 04yd 76 55 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD45N4 45 60 50 0 218 72yd 60 15yd 32 81yd 16404 4 65 62 yd 43 74 yd ATV71HD55N4 55 75 70 2 0 218 72yd 54 68yd 27 34yd 16404 4 60 15yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD75N4 75 100 95 4 0 218 72 yd 4921 4 27 34yd 164 04yd 60 15yd 32 81 yd Altivar 71 Motor Cable cross section Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Shielded BELDEN cable Shielded PROTOFLEX cable Type 2950x Type EMV 2YSLCY J kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 ATV71H
54. 41 In 1 0 64 In 1 See page 142 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 2 DC injection time 1 0 1 to 30 s See page 142 Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 DC inject level 2 banus ee See page 142 Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 0 1 to 30s See page 142 Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 59 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric C
55. 5 Ig S le cC IF gt E 5 xx I Ja a JO Reference operations 136 4 4 4 e 1 speed 3 page 150 ee e 1 Management of limit switches page 156 147 4 t e 1 PID regulator page 177 e 4 e e e e 01 Traverse control page 210 e e e e e JOG operation page 145 e e e e 6 Brake logic control page 161 e ee e e Catch on the fly page 222 e e 1 DC injection stop page 141 e 2 Fast stop 141 e 2 t Freewheel stop page 141 speed around a reference page 152 e o e 1 High speed hoisting page 172 e o e Torque control page 183 e 1 e 1 1 e 1 e 1 1 e 1 1 e e e Load sharing page 85 e e Positioning by sensors page 196 e 1 Open loop synchronous motor page 74 e e e 1 Torque control and these functions are only incompatible while torque control mode is active 2 Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated 8 Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 see diagrams on pages 118 and 119 Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator 3 4 M o e t e Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable Priority functions functions which cannot be active at the sa
56. Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Application functions Functions on speed references Differential bipolar reference 91 Reference delinearization magnifying glass effect 93 Frequency control input 125 Reference switching 126 135 Reference summing 134 E Reference subtraction 134 Reference multiplication 134 E S ramps 197 Jog operation 145 Preset speeds 146 E speed speed using single action pushbuttons 149 1 step speed speed using double action pushbuttons 149 2 steps speed around a reference 151 Save reference 153 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Application functions Application specific functions Fast stop 141 Limit switch management 155 gl Brake control 157 B Ed Load measurement 166 B High speed hoisting 168 Rope slack 171 B PID regulator 178 Torque monitoring 182 Bl Motor generator torque limit 185 m Load sharing 85 Bg B Line contactor control 189 El Output contactor control 191 Positioning by limit switches or sensors 193 B Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 195 E ENA system mechanical with unbalanced load 80 Parameter switching 198 Bl iB Motor or configuration switching 201 g E Traverse contr
57. F230Hex W0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Prg card scan in3 CMD WORD IMAGE Controller Inside card Prg card scan in4 FREG WORD RUN Term 450 00Hz 80 Prg card scan in5 MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG Term 50 00Hz 80 Input scanner Prg card scan in1 Prg card scan in2 Input scanner Prg card scan in6 0 CANopen MAP Output scanner Prg card scan in7 0 PROG CARD SCANNER Prg card scan in8 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A Output scanner PLC card scan Out PLC card scan Out2 PLC card scan Out3 PLC card scan Out4 PLC card scan Out5 PLC card scan Out6 0 PLC card scan Out7 0 PLC card scan Out8 0 Input scanner and Output scanner Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input and 8 output 50 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups ALGr HMI Frequency ref LFr Internal PID ref rPI HMI torque ref Ltr Multiplying coeff MFr Frequency ref FrH Torque reference trr Output frequency rFr Measured output fr MMF Pulse in work freq FqS Motor current LCr ENA avg speed AUS Motor speed SPd Motor voltage UOP Motor power OPr Motor torque Otr Mains voltage
58. FUNCT F Un Application functions amp 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLE Fault management 1 9 COMMUNICATION Communication 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 1 PL Controller Inside card 1 6 MONITORING CONFIG A single function can be assigned to each input A single function can be assigned to each input 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Several functions be assigned to each input Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert parameters Expert parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input Several functions can be assigned to each input 1 be accessed if the Controller Inside card is present 1755855 12 2009 33 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Structure of parameter tables The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus can be used with both the graphic display terminal and the integrated display terminal They therefore contain information for these two terminals in accordance with the description below Example 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 5 Name Description __ Adjustment range Factory setting 4 SPEED speed assignment 7 No nO function inactive LH Q 3 1 Name of menu on 4 digit 7 segment display 5 Name of menu on graphic display terminal 2 Submenu code on 4 digit 7 segment disp
59. FVC FUC Closed loop current flux vector control for motors with incremental encoder type sensor this option can only be selected if an incremental encoder card has been inserted This function is not possible however when using an encoder that generates signal A only This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in a closed loop configuration It provides better performance in terms of speed and torque accuracy and enables torque to be obtained at zero speed It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive It is essential that the encoder check page 78 is performed successfully before selecting FVC FUC V F 2pts UF2 Simple V F profile without slip compensation It supports operation with Special motors wound rotor tapered rotor etc A number of motors in parallel on the same drive High speed motors Motors with a low power rating in comparison to that of the drive Voltage 1 The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS and UO Frequency 5 V F 5pts UF5 5 segment V F profile As V F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance saturation Voltage UnS U5 The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS UO to U5 and FO to F5 FrS gt F5 gt F4 gt F3 gt F2 gt F1 E 1 1 1
60. I Limit 0 to 1 65 In 1 Current limitation at high speed The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO I Limit CSO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 61 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 0to5000r1600Hz 40 Hz I Limit frequency according to rating Frequency threshold above which the high speed limitation current is active The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO I Limit CSO Rope slack config No nO Rope slack function The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO No nO Function inactive O Drive estim drl Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive Ext sensor PES Measurement of the load using a weight sensor can only be assigned if Weight sensor ass PES page 167 is not No nO 0 to 100 0 Rope slack trq level Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off load as a of the rated load The parameter can be accessed if Rope slack trq level rSd has been assigned 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operat
61. I O profile IO 1 Ref 2 switching ch1 active Fr1 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1 channel Fr1 active ch2 active Fr2 no switching Ref 2 channel Fr2 active LH L11 L O See the assignment conditions on page 124 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active If the assigned bit or input is at 1 channel Ref 2 channel Fr2 is active Ref 2 channel No nO No nO Not assigned If Profile CHCF Not separ SIM the command is at the terminals with a zero reference If Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO the reference is zero 11 11 Analog input AI2 AI2 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Speed UPat Speed command HMI LCO Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted 00 126 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com
62. If the assigned input or bit is at 1 fault monitoring is inactive Active faults are reset on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit Note The Power Removal function and any faults that prevent any form of operation are not affected by this function A list of faults affected by this function appears on pages 268 to 273 1755855 12 2009 231 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Network fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with a communication card O Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being
63. Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 6 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description o o o Ej o Alarm groups Frequency ref Torque reference Output frequency Motor current ENA avg speed Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state Consumption Run time Power on time IGBT alarm counter PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output 02 to 06 Config active Utilised param set in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration as a in Hz in A parameter displayed in factory configuration in Hz in rpm in V in W as a in V as a as a as a in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms as a as a as a in Hz Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted CNFO 1 or 2 see page 201 SET1 2 or 3 see page 199 Select the parameter using ENT then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT 1 or 2 par
64. Inside card O No Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations Note In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations 2 Configurations CnF1 must also be configured J Auto tune assign No nO O No nO Not assigned s Ln LI1 fe lt See the assignment conditions on page 124 Auto 56 is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 cg Note Auto tuning causes the motor to start up 204 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Traverse control Function for winding reels of yarn in textile applications Traverse control Winding drive drive Reel of yarn Gearbox Main shaft Winding motor N Thread guide Thread Gearbox VETTEL E 2222 ee J Traverse control motor Cam The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady compact and linear A Run command LI or traverse control bit t Motor speed Base reference ramp dEC ramp 1 start of function end of function Bit 15 of word LRS1 traverse control active The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been enab
65. Interruption in communication on the Modbus bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the Modbus User s Manual PowerSuite com Fault communicating with PowerSuite Check the PowerSuite connecting cable Check the time out HMI com Fault communicating with the graphic display terminal Check the terminal connection Check the time out TORQUE TIME OUT FLT The time out of the torque control function is attained Check the function s settings Check the state of the mechanism Torque current lim Switch to torque limitation Check if there are any mechanical problems Check the parameters of TORQUE LIMITATION tLA page 186 and the parameters of the TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT tld fault page 233 IGBT overheat Drive overheated Check the size of the load motor drive Reduce the switching frequency Wait for the motor to cool before restarting 272 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset as soon as their causes disappear The USF fault can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 231 Fault Name Probable cause Remedy Incorrect config Option card changed or removed Check that there are no card errors In the event of the option car
66. LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1 If the input returns to state 1 and the command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 89 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not anew run command must be sent g DC inject level 1 1 3 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode The parameter be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection dCI or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 OBS Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection dCI or if DC injection assign dCl is not No nO 1 3 0 1 In 2 to DC inject 0 5 In 2 4 DC inject level 2 level 1 IdC Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed The parameter be accessed if Type of stop Stt
67. LI6 116 LI7 Li7 to L110 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 Li11 L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 to CD13 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Oo If Profile CHCF 8 serie SE8 then only Yes YES and are available A CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT It is absolutely necessary to carry out further parameter setting on all ATV71 drive connnected to Active Front End AFE Check the list of parameter on next page Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1755855 12 2009 215 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Active Front End connection It is necessary to carry out the following settings for all frequency inverters connected to an active front end Parameter Mains voltage UrES Same setting as the active front en
68. Li7 to LI10 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 Li11 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In I O profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Assignment of the reverse direction command 1755855 12 2009 89 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments 0 to 200 ms 0 J On Delay This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can be adjusted between 0 and 200 milliseconds in order to filter out possible interference The change to state 0 is taken into account without delay A WARNING UNINTENDED EQU
69. MAP to PROG CARD AO MAP by turning the navigation button RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 ENT Min 0 001 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A ENT Min 0 001 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication Term 50 00Hz COMMUNICATION MAP Modbus ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5 Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 230 Hex W0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP PROG CARD SCANNER COMMUNICATION MAP indicates the types of bus used for control or reference the corresponding command and reference values the status word the words selected in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu etc The display format hexadecimal or decimal can be configured in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu COM SCANNER INPUT MAP Com Scan In1 val Com Scan In2 val Com Scan In3 val Com Scan In4 val Com Scan In5 val Com Scan In6 val 0 Com Scan In7 val 0 Com Scan In8 val 0 RUN Term 4 50 00Hz 80A RUN Term 450 00Hz 80 CMD WORD IMAGE __ Modbus cmd 0000 Hex CANopen cmd 0000 Hex COM card cmd 0000 Hex P
70. Output 0to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Voltage 100 LJ AO1 max Output 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Voltage 10U 1755855 12 2009 111 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Scaling AO1 min 0 to 100 0 0 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation T Scaling AO1 max 0 to 100 0 100 0 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation L1 AO1 Filter 0to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering This parameter is forced to 0 if AO1 asisgnment AO1 O1 001 112 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O AO2 assignment No nO Same assignments as 1 without dO 1 dO1 AO2 Type Current 0A O Voltage 10U Voltage output O Current 0A Current output O Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output AO2 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Current 0A AO2 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Current 0A
71. POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments I R2 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 104 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R3 Assignment Identical to R2 R3 Delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R3 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configu
72. Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The parameter changes back to No nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete The drive can only be reinitialized when locked s ed CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage No nO 1 Product reset assig Parameter can only be modified in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization via logic input Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input The drive can only be reinitialized when locked No nO Function inactive O LI Li1 to LI6 116 L1 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted O L111 Li11 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted To assign reinitialization press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 220 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Descripti
73. SVC V UUC only up to 45 kW for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW for ATV71eeeN4 and Max frequency tFr must not exceed 100 Hz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage GB Switching freq 1 According to rating According to rating Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive ATV71H or W the rating power and voltage and the configuration of the Sinus filter and Motor surge limit SUL parameters page 83 If the value is less than 2 kHz Current Limitation CLI and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 61 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with the drive stopped No restrictions Ee Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Ee Note If Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC we do not recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz in order to avoid speed instability CAUTION ATV71e075NA4 to U40N4 drives if the RFI filte
74. Syn EMF constant 0 to 65535 to drive Synchronous motor EMF constant in mV per rpm peak voltage per phase On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 1 Autotune L d axis ane to drive Axis d stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis 145 Stator inductance L 0 to 655 3 According to drive rating 1 Autotune L q axis Axis q stator inductance in mH per phase On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis 145 Stator inductance L According to drive According to drive 1 Cust stator R syn Es 9 eeu 9 Cold state stator resistance per winding The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed The value can be entered by the user if he knows it Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 0 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not V F 2pts UF2 and V F 5pts UF5 Used to optimize the torque at very low speed increase IR compensation UFr if the torque is insufficient Check that the IR compensation UFr value is not too high when the motor is warm risk of instability 0 to 300 1 Slip compensation The pa
75. amp a a Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Precharge cont ass Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned LO1 Lo1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 dO1 Analog output AC1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO 214 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Active Front End connection This function is not accessible for ATV71HeeeS6X 2 and for ATV71HeeeY 2 110 kW 150 HP HHP range Direct power supply via Active Front End AFE reduces the mains current harmonics to less than 496 and gives enables the drive to feedback the generative energy to the mains supply Example circuit using one AFE for one ATV71 f SN Semiconductor fuses NEN s EN y E 4 L1 1L2 113 LFM 1211 2L2 213 MEN RU eA Oe aaa Sees Se as AFE Active Front End LFM Line Filter Module LFC Line Filter Choke AIC Active Infeed Converter Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Regen Connection No nO Not assigned Yes YES Function always active L11 L 1 to
76. applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 CANopen fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated CANopen Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with cer
77. been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 1755855 12 2009 227 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 UnderV fault mgt FIt amp R 1 open 0 Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage Flt amp R1open 0 Fault and fault relay open Flt amp R1close 1 Fault and fault relay closed O Alarm 2 Alarm and fault relay remains closed The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay According to drive According to drive voltage rating voltage rating 1 Mains voltage Rated voltage of the line supply in V For ATV71ATV71eeeM3 200V ac 200 200 Volts AC 220V ac 220 220 Volts AC 240V ac 240 240 Volts AC 260V ac 260 260 Volts AC factory setting For ATV71eeeN4 380V ac 380 380 Volts AC 400V ac 400 400 Volts AC 440V ac 440 440 Volts AC 460V ac 460 460 Volts AC 480V ac 480 480 Volts AC factory setting For ATV71eeeS6X 500 Vac 500 500 Volts AC 600 Vac 600 600 Volts AC factory setti
78. between the drive and the motor The request for the contactor to close is made when a run command is sent The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor CAUTION If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode as the contactor only opens at the end of braking Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Output contactor feedback The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation In the event of an inconsistency the drive trips on an FCF2 fault if the output contactor fails to close LIx at 1 and on an 1 fault if it is stuck LIx at 0 The parameter Delay to motor run dbS can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command is sent and the Delay to open cont GAS parameter delays the fault when a stop command is set Note Fault FCF2 contactor failing to close can be reset by the run command changing state from 1 to 0 0 gt 1 gt 0 in 3 wire control The contactor ass OCC and Output contact fdbk functions can be used individually or together 1755855 12 2009 191 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Out contactor ass Logic o
79. by Schneider Electric Product Support Internal fault option The option installed in the drive is not recognized Check the reference and compatibility of the option Internal hard init Initialization of the drive is incomplete Turn off and reset Internal ctrl supply The control power supply is incorrect Check the control section power supply Internal measure The current measurements are incorrect Replace the current sensors or the power card Inspect repair the drive Internal mains circuit The input stage is not operating correctly Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Internal th sensor The drive temperature sensor is not operating correctly The braking unit s temperature sensor is not operating correctly Replace the drive temperature sensor Inspect repair the drive Replace the braking unit s temperature sensor Inspect repair the braking unit The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt DUb parameter page 238 if there is no braking unit connected to the drive Internal time meas Fault on the electronic time measurement component Inspect repair the drive internal CPU Internal microprocessor fault Turn off and reset Inspect repair the drive Overcurrent Parameters in the SETTINGS SEt and 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menus are not
80. can be used to manage trajectory limits using limit switches The stop mode is configurable When the stop contact is activated startup in the other direction is authorized Example Reverse Forward stop Reverse Forward stop The stop is activated when the input is at 0 contact open 1755855 12 2009 155 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Stop FW limit sw No nO No nO Function inactive LI 1 L11 F LI6 Li6 L17 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI11 L111 to LHA 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 c to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In I O profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile IO can be switched without logic inputs A Stop RV limit sw No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw LAF below El m A 1 Stop type
81. can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions e Auto tuning which causes the motor to start up The adjustment parameters on page 44 Note The parameters of the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu must be entered in the order in which they appear as the later ones are dependent on the first ones For example 2 3 wire control tCC must be configured before any other parameters The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu should be configured on its own or before the other drive configuration menus If a modification has previously been made to any of them in particular in 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC some 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM parameters may be changed for example the motor parameters if a synchronous motor has been selected Returning to the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu after modifying another drive configuration menu is unnecessary but does not pose any risk Changes following modification of another configuration menu are not described to avoid unnecessary complication in this section Macro configuration Macro configuration provides a means of speeding up the configuration of functions for a specific field of application 7 macro configurations are available Start stop factory configuration Handling General use Hoisting PID regulator Communication bus Master slave Selecting a macro configuration assigns the parameters in this macro configuration Eac
82. commands are sent via a bus they are available on a word which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word More than one function can be assigned to the same bit Cg Note Stop commands from the terminals remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel Cg Note The integrated Modbus channel has 2 physical communication ports The Modbus network port The Modbus HMI port The drive does not differentiate between these two ports but recognizes the graphic display terminal irrespective of the port to which it is connected 1755855 12 2009 117 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Reference channel for Not separ SIM Separate SEP and I O profile IO configurations PID not configured Ref 1B switching Ref 1 channel di no i kar Proset Note Forced local is not Fe gt speeds 4 active in I O profile Ref 1B e i Al3 4 nO h LFr pn d g a Al4 5 1 terminal LCC Summing ref 3 H 3 X Subtract ref 2 9 Y F 5 Subtract ref 3 acne P Multiplier ref 2 c nO MAZ
83. control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 14 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if Al4 min value CrL4 page 97 is not greater than 3 mA or if Al4 Type Al4t page 97 Voltage 10U Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indic
84. correct Inertia or load too high Mechanical locking Check the parameters Check the size of the motor drive load Check the state of the mechanism Power removal Fault with the drive s Power removal safety function Inspect repair the drive Motor short circuit Impedant sh circuit Ground short circuit Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Significant earth leakage current at the drive output if several motors are connected in parallel Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Reduce the switching frequency Connect chokes in series with the motor Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake Increase the Time to restart ttr page 66 Overspeed Instability or driving load too high Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add a braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the parameters settings for the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 235 if it is configured 1755855 12 2009 269 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Probable cause Speed fdback loss Encoder feedback signal missing Check the wiring between the encoder and the drive Check the encoder Signal on Pu
85. drive 4 Rated motor volt rating rating and Standard mot freq bFr The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate 71 100 to 240 V ATV71eeeNA4 200 to 480 V ATV71eeeS6X 400 to 600 ATV71eeeY 400 to 690 V 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr 1 Rated mot current The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn Rated motor current given on the nameplate 10 to 1600 Hz 50 Hz 1 Rated motor freq The parameter cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freg bFr is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is limited to 500 Hz if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not V F or for ATV71eeeY drives or for drives rated higher than ATV71HD37 Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Rated motor freq FrS 1 rpm increment x1 rpm 1 Increment of parameter Rated motor speed nSP x1 rpm 1 Increment of 1 rpm to be used if Rated motor speed nSP does not exceed 65535 rpm O x10 rpm 10 Increment of 10 rpm to be used if
86. ee 200029o02rz I i aih 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 158 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Brake logic control vertical movement in open loop mode Frequency 4 s ee eat I eee Mk ee ed uonoelu gt 5 c 2 o 2 a g E 9 oO o 5 E G a lt ee yj IQ pata x b il _ e a enbJo REPE carl e ig bo lo MN xn 4 t 7 Fog 1 1 1 1 1 tot 1 1 cm a xe dai o o0 8 59 9 5636 5 2B 88 c I 2 cs amp S o e c 5 EG E o 59 3 02 5 5 o o 5 8 D 5 x G 2 3 5 O o E a u 2 oO gt a o 82 20 5 gt O spalo
87. in death or serious injury Point 1 X 0 to 99 99 0 to 99 99 of signal on assigned input Point 1x LP1 must be less than Point 2x LP2 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Point 1Y 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 1 X LP1 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Point 2X 0 01 to 10096 0 01 to 100 of signal on assigned input Point 2x LP2 must be greater than Point 1x LP1 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned J Point 2Y 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 2x LP2 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Ibr 4 20 mA loss 0 to 1 36 In 1 Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4 20 mA loss fault is deactivated Recommended settings Ofor elevators Rated motor current for a hoisting application 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 167 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APP
88. in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 161 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake Release time 0 to 5 00 s Brake release time delay 2 Brake release freq Auto AUtO Brake release frequency threshold initialization of acceleration ramp The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 161 is Hoisting UEr O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters O 0 to 10 Hz Manual control T Brake engage freq 1 Auto AUtO Brake engage frequency threshold The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not FVC FUC O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters O Oto 10 Hz Manual control Brake engage at 0 No nO Brake engages at regulated zero speed The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC FUC Can be used to engage the brake at zero speed in closed loop mode with speed regulation This parameter can be used to adjust the brake engage delay once zero speed has been reac
89. input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence e If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 238 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Note During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current 1 Automatic autotune O No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed on every power up Caution Same comments as for Auto tuning tUn above If Profile CHCF 8 serie SE8 then Automatic autotune AUt is fixed to No nO Not done tAb Auto tuning state For information only cannot be modified Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor Pending Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress Failed FAIL Auto tuning has failed Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor Customized CUS Auto tuning has been performed but at least one parameter set by this auto tuning operation has subsequently been modified The Auto tuning tUn parameter then returns
90. itchi 5 F L Bi Forced local Cmd switching CLS EL o m SEP nO CMD Forward Reverse STOP nO Graphic display STOP YES terminal m PSE Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Commands Cd1 Cd2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card 1755855 12 2009 121 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for I O profile IO configuration Separate reference and command as in Separate SEP configuration The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1 Frib and Fr2 Cmd channel 1 Cdl gt Note Forced local is not active in I O profile LI Profile F d local itchi FL orced loca Cmd switching CS5 THEE F L 0 LY qm nO CMD Forward Reverse STOP no Graphic display STOP YES terminal n PSE Cd 2 Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Commands Cd1 Cd2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integra
91. least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop O Active low LO Stop controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs Active high HIG Stop controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs Slowdown forward No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above 11 Slowdown reverse Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above Active high HIG A Slowdown limit cfg The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown O Active low LO Slowdown controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs Active high HIG Slowdown controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs 196 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Disable limit sw No nO The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned O No nO Not assigned LI1 Li1 See the assignment condition
92. may be necessary to readjust the integral gain in order to avoid an overvoltage trip Note Once the adjustments are complete check that the pump starts up correctly If the ENA integral gain setting is too low this may lead to insufficient torque on startup Reduction ratio This setting corresponds to the motor speed ahead of gearbox speed after gearbox ratio This parameter is used to display the average speed in Hz and the machine speed in customer units e g in strokes per minute on the graphic display terminal In order to be displayed on the graphic display terminal these values must be selected in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu Adjustment recommendations for prevention of tripping on an Overspeed SOF fault ENA SYSTEM authorizes overspeed which can trigger an Overspeed SOF fault To avoid this occurring it is advisable to increase the value of the following parameters slightly Max frequency tFr page 70 Overspd pulse thd page 235 if the frequency meter function is configured 80 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Ll ENA system No nO The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt SVC V see page 71 nl No nO Function inactive YES O Yes YES Function active Eee 11 ENA prop gain 1 110 9999 Q The parameter can be accessed if ENA system
93. measuring time Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive for ascending and descending 1755855 12 2009 169 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Current limiting mode Ascend command Reference i 1 BL ecc di iui Le LU eee SEAE EE eee eee ass 0 ME Frequency HSP di M 4 Limit imposed by current FrS limitation SCL Current CLO SCL Adjustable speed threshold above which current limitation is active CLO Current limitation for high speed function Cg Note The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in comparison with nominal network voltage 170 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Rope slack The rope slack function can be used to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set down ready for lifting but the rope is still slack as illustrated below A ANNI SINS HAD Speed 4 OSP Load rstL 4 The speed step OSP para
94. menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Command and reference channels Run commands forward reverse stop etc and references can be sent using the following channels Control Reference Terminals logic inputs LI Terminals analog inputs Al frequency input encoder Graphic display terminal Graphic display terminal Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Integrated CANopen Communication card Communication card Controller Inside card Controller Inside card speed via the terminals speed via the graphic display terminal The behavior of the Altivar 71 can be adapted according to requirements 8 serie SE8 To replace an Altivar 58 See the Migration Manual Not separ SIM Command and reference are sent via the same channel Separate SEP Command and reference may be sent via different channels In these configurations control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely assignable bits see Communication Parameters Manual The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface I O profile IO The command and the reference can come from different channels This configuration both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus When
95. menu which appears on the product on power up Drive menu Displays the drive menu Sim start Displays the simply start menu Monitoring Displays the monitoring menu Settings Displays the settings menu Mot Ctrl Displays the control motor menu I O Conf Displays the inputs outputs configuration menu Command Displays the command menu Appli fun Displays the application function menu Fault mgt Displays the fault management menu Com Displays the communication menu Diagnostics Displays the diagnostics menu Ident Displays the identification menu Factory Set Displays the factory settings menu User menu Displays the user menu CI menu Displays the card CI menu Main menu Displays the main menu TEES ESI 1755855 12 2009 265 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com MULTIPOINT SCREEN Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same bus The addresses of the drives must be configured in advance in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu using the Modbus Address Add parameter page 243 When a number of drives are connected to the same display terminal the terminal automatically displays the following screens CONNECTION IN PROGRESS Jer MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address
96. mode This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way When a pairing password is entered the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored On every subsequent power up these parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive locks in HCF fault mode Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to the original situation or re enter the pairing password The following parameters are verified The type of card for all cards The software version for the two control cards the VW3A3202 extension card the Controller Inside card and the communication cards The serial number for the two control cards Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Pairing password OFF to 9999 OFF OFF The OFF OFF value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive The ON On value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in the event of a card pairing fault As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to ON On The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support 1755855 12 2009 239 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting _ Fallback speed 0 to 1600 Hz
97. of the speed and speed buttons can be set as a of this reference A On stopping the reference A speed is not saved so the drive restarts with reference A only The maximum total reference is always limited by High speed HSP and the minimum reference by Low speed LSP see page 44 Example of 2 wire control Acceleration 2 AC2 Motor frequency SrP 4 Deceleration 2 dE2 ReferenceA TN SrP96 4 LSP LSP Reference A SrP 1 Forward Forward Reverse 1755855 12 2009 151 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn LI speed assignment No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 1 Speed assignment No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 0 to 50 10 Speed limitation This parameter limits the variation range with speed as a of the reference The ramps used in this function are Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to accelerate f
98. opening time of the output contactor If it is set to 0 the fault will not be monitored If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 192 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Positioning by sensors or limit switches This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or using control word bits Slowing down Stopping The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 or a falling edge change from 1 to 0 The example below has been configured on a rising edge A Forward run command Reverse run command Slowdown forward Stop FW limit sw Speed Low speed LSP 0 The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured The operation is identical for both directions of operation Slowdown and stopping operate according to the same logic described below Example Forward slowdown on rising edge Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation The slowdown command is then memorized even in the event of a power outage Operation in the opposite direction is au
99. parameters O Alarm YES Alarm The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay see page 103 O Fault FLt Switch to fault DOF with locking of drive freewheel stop Note The thermal state of the resistor can be displayed on the graphic display terminal It is calculated for as long as the drive control remains connected to the power supply DB Resistor Power TODO LOSS DELIS QUE This parameter can be accessed if DB res protection brO is not No nO Rated power of the resistor used g DB Resistor value 0 1 to 200 ohms 0 1 ohms This parameter can be accessed if DB res protection brO is not No nO Rated value of the braking resistor in ohms 1 Brake res fault Mgt Freewheel YES Management of short circuit DB unit sh circuit 00 and overheating Internal th sensor InFb faultsin the braking unit O Ignore nO Fault ignored Configuration to be used if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive O Freewheel YES freewheel stop Autotune fault mgt Freewheel YES Ignore nO Fault ignored O Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 238 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Card pairing Function can only be accessed in Expert
100. provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Fault reset Manual fault reset No nO Function inactive L11 Lit to LI6 LI6 Li7 to LI10 Li10 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 Li11 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In I O profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Faults are reset when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the fault has disappeared The STOP RESET button on the graphic display terminal performs the same function See pages 268 to 272 for a list of faults that can be reset manually 11 Product reset No nO Parameter can only be accessed in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Reinitialization
101. ramp and stabilize quickly and the PID feedback must follow the speed If this is not the case see the settings for the drive and or sensor signal and wiring Switch to PID mode Set brA to no no auto adaptation of the ramp Set the PID ramp PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an ObF fault Set the integral gain 1 to minimum Leave the derivative gain rdG at 0 Observe the PID feedback and the reference Switch the drive ON OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times Set the proportional gain rPG in order to ascertain the best compromise between response time and stability in transient phases slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state gradually increase the integral gain rIG reduce the proportional gain rPG in the event of instability pump applications find a compromise between response time and static precision see diagram Lastly the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved although this will make it more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability as it depends on 3 gains Perform in production tests over the whole reference range 1755855 12 2009 175 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Stabilization time Regulate
102. serious injury 98 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting RP assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse In input in order to check for example for compatibility problems Jg RP min value 30 00 to 30 00 kHz Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed 0 to 30 00 kHz 30 00 kHz 1 RP max value Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed RP filter 0 to 1000 ms Interference filtering 1755855 12 2009 99 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Configuration of the encoder input serving as a reference with a frequency generator This reference is not signed therefore the directions of operation must be given via the control channel logic inputs for example Minimum and maximum values input values The minimum value corresponds to a minimum reference of 0 and the maximum value to a maximum reference of 100 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value It may also be negative Reference Reference A 100 100 i Frequency input Freq min value Freq max value 30
103. soon as the operation is complete With the graphic display terminal see previous page LI Save config No nO O Config 0 Str0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s O Config 1 Str0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s O Config 2 510 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection For example if it is Config 0 StrO only Config 1 Str1 and Config 2 Str2 appear The parameter changes back to No nO as soon as the operation is complete List of motor parameters 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS UO UO to U5 U5 F1 F1 to F5 F5 V constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode page 75 1 8 SETTINGS SEt menu therm current Example of total return to factory settings 1 Config Source FCSI 2 Macro Conf Inl 2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST FrY AIl ALL 3 Goto FACTORY SETTINGS GFS YES
104. the 8 input word Scan Out1 address Address of the 151 output word Scan Out2 address Address of the 274 output word Scan Out3 address Address of 314 output word Scan Out4 address Address of the 4 output word Scan Out5 address Address of the 5 output word Scan Out6 address Address of the 6 output word Scan Out7 address Address of the 77 output word Scan Out8 address Address of the 8 output word 242 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting _ HMI baud rate 19 2 kbps 9 6 or 19 2 kbps via the integrated display terminal 9600 or 19200 bauds via the graphic display terminal The graphic display terminal only operates if HMI baud rate tbr2 19200 bauds 19 2 kbps In order for any change in the assignment of HMI baud rate tbr2 to be taken into account you must Provide confirmation in a confirmation window if using the graphic display terminal Press the ENT key for 2 s if using the integrated display terminal HMI format PET Read only parameter cannot be modified Modbus Address OFF to 247 Modbus add Prg C Modbus address of the Controller Inside card OFF at 247
105. the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 90 0 Drv therm state al Oito 118 100 Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm logic output or relay Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 1755855 12 2009 225 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Deferred stop on thermal alarm This function is designed in particular for elevator applications It prevents the elevator stopping between two floors if the drive or motor overheats by authorizing operation until the next stop At the next stop the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value which undershoots the set threshold by 20 Example A trip threshold set at 80 enables reactivation at 60 One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive and one thermal state threshold for the motor s which will trip the deferred sto
106. the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function Manual reference PIM Predictive speed reference FPI Analog inputs to Al4 Frequency input Encoder AH Al2 Alt Al2 Analog input Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Al4 AI4 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted rere gt nH Setting up the PID regulator 1 Configuration in PID mode See the diagram on page 173 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode in most cases this will be sufficient To optimize the drive adjust rPG or rlG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode without PID regulator and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system In steady state the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PID feedback signal must be stable In transient state the speed must follow the
107. to factory settings with Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl page 250 will return the drive to the selected macro configuration The Macro configuration CFG parameter does not change although Customized macro CCFG disappears Ee Note The factory settings that appear in the parameter tables correspond to Macro configuration CFG Start Stop StS This is the macro configuration set at the factory 1755855 12 2009 39 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Example diagrams for use with the macro configurations Hoisting HSt diagram TEE ii c Forward Reverse LL il acd 220 A L2 13 LH 24 LI2 ATV71Heeee 49 4 V Electromagnetic brake 1 A contact on the Preventa module must be inserted in the brake control circuit to engage it safely when the Power Removal safety function is activated see connection diagrams in the Installation Manual Mast slave MSL diagram Speed Torque p Forward Reverse Forward Reverse 3 Ltd ps LM 424 LI2 LM u2 424 ATV 71Heeee afi ATV 71Heeee Master drive Slave drive When the two motors are mechanically connected the Speed torque contact closing results in operation in Mast slave mode The master drive regulates the speed and controls the slave drive
108. with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault Factory setting Ignore nO for ATV71e037M3 to U30MS Freewheel YES for all others 1 Overtemp fault mgt Freewheel YES CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Behavior in the event of the drive overheating Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when
109. with the integrated display terminal Spares and repairs Consult Schneider Electric product support 1755855 12 2009 267 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies Drive does not start no fault displayed Ifthe display does not light up check the power supply to the drive The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up The ATV71 then displays Freewheel nSt in freewheel stop and Fast stop FSt in fast stop This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break Make sure that the run command input or inputs are activated in accordance with the selected control mode 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt parameters page 89 If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction see pages 155 and 193 f the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus when the power supply is connected the drive will display Freewheel nSt and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command Faults which cannot be reset automatically The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on AnF brF
110. x rSU UnS rSP Frs x rSU UnS Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 212 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Half floor The half floor function is designed for elevator applications When an elevator sets off from floors and half floors the cycle time for half floors can be too long as the elevator does not have time to reach full speed before crossing the slowdown limit switch As a result the slowdown time is unnecessarily long The half floor function can be used to compensate this by not triggering slowdown until the speed reaches a preset threshold Half floor speed HLS in order that the final part of the path will be the same as for a standard floor The graphs below illustrate the various operating scenarios with and without the function Frequency 4 Standard floor A Slowdown limit switch reached B Stop limit switch reached Distance floor Slowdown frequency 1 SERERE MEER Distance A BC Frequency 4 Half floor without function Slowdown frequency lad MEC IDEE amp Distance A Frequency Half floor with function The function is only activated if when the slowdown limit P switch is tripped the motor frequency is less than Half floor
111. 0 kHz Freq max value Freq min value 300 kHz EIL EFr EFr EIL Reference A 100 95 1 ee Freq min value 0 Freq max value 300 kHz input EIL EFr A reference can be obtained at zero frequency by assigning a negative value to the minimum value d 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder type a The parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted To be configured in accordance with the type of encoder used AABB AAbb For signals A A B B O AB Ab For signals A B A A For signal A Value cannot be accessed if Encoder usage EnU page 102 Spd fdk reg rEG _ Encoder check Not done nO Checks the encoder feedback See procedure page 80 The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted and if Encoder usage EnU page 102 is not Speed ref PGr O Not done nO Check not performed O Yes YES Activates monitoring of the encoder O Done dOnE Check performed successfully The check procedure checks The direction of rotation of the encoder motor The presence of signals wiring continuity
112. 00 Hz 0 0 Hz This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt or Ramp stop rMP 0 0 Does not switch to freewheel stop 0 1 to 1600 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop No nO 1 Freewheel stop No nO Not assigned LI1 Li1 to LI6 Li6 Li7 to L110 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 Li11 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile can be switched without logic inputs o EJ al The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 89 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt 2 Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must b
113. 075N4 0 75 1 1 5 14 54 68yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU15N4 1 5 2 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU22N4 2 2 3 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU30N4 3 2 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd 71 040 4 4 5 1 5 14 54 68yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU55N4 5 5 7 5 2 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU75N4 7 5 10 2 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD11N4 11 15 6 10 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV7Z1HD15N4 15 20 10 8 54 68yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD18N4 18 5 25 10 8 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD22N4 22 30 16 6 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 yd ATV71HD30N4 30 40 25 4 82 02 yd 43 74 27 34 yd ATV71HD37N4 37 50 35 5 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 yd ATV71HD45N4 45 60 50 0 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 yd ATV71HD55N4 55 75 70 2 0 82 02yd 32 81 yd 16 40 yd ATV71HD75N4A 75 100 95 4 0 82 02yd 32 81 yd 16 40 yd For 230 400 V motors used at 230 V the Motor surge limit SUL parameter can remain No nO 84 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting According to drive AJ Braking level voltage Ang DC bus voltage threshold above which the braking transistor cuts in to limit this voltage ATV71eeeeM3e factory setting 395 V ATV71eeeeN4 factory setting 785 V ATV71eeeeS6X factory setting 980 V ATV71eeeeY factory setting 1127 V or 1080 V according to rating The adjustment range depend
114. 1 page 66 Freq meter Alarm FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd page 67 Dynamic load alarm Load variation detection see DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT dLd page 237 See the multiple selection procedure on page 30 for the integrated display terminal and page 21 for the graphic display terminal o o El E Ej E Ej Oo El o 3 o EJ o E o Li o Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION 1 Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A1C 1755855 12 2009 115 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL With graphic display terminal 0A 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG MAIN MENU Code lt lt ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 6 COMMAND 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT OPEN SAVE AS 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive 116 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL The parameters in the 1 6 COMMAND CtL
115. 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Adjustment range i Copy channel 1 lt gt 2 Can be used to copy the current reference and or the command by means of switching in order to avoid speed surges for example If Profile CHCF page 125 Not separ SIM or Separate SEP copying will only be possible from channel 1 to channel 2 If Profile CHCF I O profile IO copying will be possible in both directions No nO No copy O Reference SP Copy reference O Command Cd Copy command ref ALL Copy command and reference Areference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals The reference copied is FrH before ramp unless the destination channel reference is set via speed In this case the reference copied is rFr after ramp A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Copying the command and or reference can change the direction of rotation Check that this is safe Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1755855 12 2009 127 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and or reference channel its action modes can be configured The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal and not on the integrated display terminal Comments The di
116. 1 is factory set for the most common operating conditions If the above values are compatible with the application the drive can be used without changing the settings Macro configuration Start Stop Motor frequency 50 Hz Constant torque application with asynchronous motor and sensorless flux vector control Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp Stop mode in the event of a fault freewheel Linear acceleration and deceleration ramps 3 seconds Low speed 0 Hz High speed 50 Hz Motor thermal current rated drive current Standstill injection braking current 0 7 x rated drive current for 0 5 seconds No automatic starts after a fault Switching frequency 2 5 kHz or 4 kHz depending on drive rating Logic inputs LI1 forward LI2 Forward 2 operating direction 2 wire control on transition L13 L14 LI5 LI6 inactive not assigned Analog inputs Al1 speed reference 0 10 V Al2 0 20 mA inactive not assigned Relay R1 The contact opens in the event of a fault or drive off Relay R2 Inactive not assigned Analog output AO1 0 20 mA inactive not assigned Option card factory settings The option card inputs outputs are not factory set This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Application functions The tables on the following pages show the most common combinations of functions and applications in order to guide your selection The applications in
117. 10 Preset speed 11 Bite 1609 2 See page 148 Preset speed 11 Preset speed 12 UE See page 148 Preset speed 12 Preset speed 13 D 10 1609 Hz See page 148 Preset speed 13 0 to 1600 Hz Preset speed 14 See page 148 Preset speed 14 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 63 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ge LI Preset speed 15 0 to 1600 Hz 90 Hz See page 148 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 0 to 1600 Hz See page 148 Preset speed 16 EE Multiplying coeff 010 100 100 Multiplying coefficient be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 page 136 has been assigned to the graphic terminal Speed limitation DIOS 1055 See page 152 Limitation of speed variation PID prop gain 0 01 to 100 See page 177 Proportional gain PID integral gain 0 01 to 100 See page 178 Integral gain PID derivative gain 0 00 to 100 See page 178 Derivative gain PID ramp 0 to 99 9 s See page 178 PID acceleratio
118. 12 2009 21 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu The first time the drive is powered up the user will automatically be guided through the menus as far as 1 DRIVE The parameters in the 1 1 SIMPLY START submenu must be configured and auto tuning performed before the motor is started up Scyipider mm ATV31HU22N4 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config n 1 3 seconds 5 LANGUAGE English Chinese Russian Turkish RDY Term 0 00Hz 0 0A 2 ACCESS LEVEL Basic Standard Advanced Expert RDY Term 0 00Hz 0 0 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ESC i RDY Term 0 00Hz 0 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Display for 3 seconds following power up Automatically switches to 5 LANGUAGE menu 3 seconds later Select the language and press ENT Switches to 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu see page 31 Select the access level and press ENT Switches to 1 DRIVE MENU see page 27 Press ESC to return to MAIN MENU 22 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal Subsequent power ups 3 seconds later switches to 1 DRIVE MENU or to 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD
119. 1755855 Altivar 71 Variable speed drives for synchronous and asynchronous motors Programming manual Software V3 3 12 2009 Schneider www schneider electric com Electric This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Contents Before you begin Documentation structure Software enhancements Steps for setting up Factory configuration ooou A Application functions 11 Setup Preliminary recommendations 15 Graphic display terminal 18 Description of terminal 18 Description of the graphic screen 19 First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu 22 Subsequent power ups 23 Programming Example of accessing a parameter Quick navigation 24 25 28 Integrated display terminal Functions of the display and the keys 28 Accessing menus 29 30 Accessing menu parameters 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC 31 Structure of parameter tables 34 35 Interdependence of parameter values Finding a parameter in this document 36 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM 37 1 2 MONITORING SUP 45 1 3 SETTINGS SEt 54 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC 68 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O 88 1 6 COMMAND CtL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1
120. 3 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 3 SETTINGS SEt The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting _ Ramp increment 0 01 0 1 1 O 0 01 ramp up to 99 99 seconds O 0 1 ramp up to 999 9 seconds 1 ramp up to 6000 seconds This parameter is valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration dEC Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 g Acceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 05 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS 69 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven N Deceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 69 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Acceleration 2 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 0s See page 139 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Deceleration 2 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 0s See page 139 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that t
121. 4 Address 5 Address 6 ESC MULTIPOINT SCREEN Rdy 0 Rpm OA R 9 R 0 A NLP 41500 Rpm 1250A Not connected Rdy 0 Rpm OA Cig Add Cfg Add Selection of drives for multipoint dialog select each address and check the box by pressing ENT This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up or if the Cfg Add function key on the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed see below ESCm 952Rpm 101A ent Motor speed Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog 952 rom Motor current 101A In multipoint mode the command channel is not displayed From left to right the state then the 2 selected parameters and finally the drive address appear All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not authorized apart from the Stop key which locks all the drives If there is a fault on a drive this drive is displayed 266 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Maintenance Servicing The Altivar 71 does not require any preventive maintenance It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly Check the condition and tightness of the connections Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective average service life of fans 3 to 5 years depending on the operating cond
122. 55 12 2009 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG dels 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL E s 2 1 1 SIMPLY START diz amp 5 1 2 MONITORING Gur 1 3 SETTINGS SEE 1 6 COMMAND CEL 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FIL fs 1 9 COMMUNICATION EON 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS EESE 4 PASSWORD C Od di 15 m d5F 51 d5P EbU ECC 4 no Co EF I EFr E IL EnH EnL Er End EnS EnL Ry eie m S I EPL ErLU EEF Ine N FI Eg N N IN Fed FY FS FOP I In Ins IS 2155 1 FdE I lt 1 is x FL I A FLO 244 FLOC 244 FLUE 244 FLr FLU N m ESS ko FA 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 281 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Gems 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 2 1 1 SIMPLY START diz amp 5 1 2 MO
123. 8 ER3 55 138 56 138 186 5153 ERr EbE 65 162 EbU 210 Ebr 243 Ebre 243 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 289 Index of parameter codes Code Page 5 e B EM ES E o z z m m tc p LE gt lt lt z gt lt o t o o a lt 9 gt m 2 a 5 2 2 tc gt o 4 gt E z o sa eso 5 m eu Su Zo 4 Ec Sun Daa c lt q t ow M co au E iu 22 Ed 2 SS aS aS 22 Eb5 229 41 89 ECE 89 Ed 59 142 240 EdC 59 142 240 EdL I 60 143 EdC e 60 144 Edn 210 Eds5 235 243 EFUe 243 EFr 42 70 EHH 225 226 EHd 50153 EHr 51 59 EHE 224 ELH 186 ELC 187 ELd 297 EL 66 186 EL IN 66 186 ELS 62 180 EnL 238 184 EDS 1 2 EHb 285 I 183 75 210 ErH 66 210 ErL 66 210 Erf 75 ErP 183 Bip ip 515539 Ert 67 183 290 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Index of parameter codes Page 1 qHOMSSVd 514 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 21 uu 7 INOILVOINNININOD 6 1 1
124. 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION ENT E Bises re 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG With integrated display terminal Summary of functions Power up rEF REFERENCE SWITCH 135 DA I REF OPERATIONS 136 RAMP 137 SEE STOP CONFIGURATION 141 AUTO DC INJECTION 143 JOG JOG 145 55 PRESET SPEEDS 147 UPd SPEED 150 5 SPEED AROUND REF 152 5 MEMO REFERENCE 153 FL I FLUXING BY LI 154 15 LIMIT SWITCHES 156 bLC BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 161 ELN EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS 167 HSH HIGH SPEED HOISTING 172 P Id PID REGULATOR 177 Pr I PID PRESET REFERENCES 181 EUr TORQUE CONTROL 183 EOL TORQUE LIMITATION 186 EL I CURRENT LIMIT 188 LLC LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 190 OCC OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD 192 LP
125. 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Trq spd switching L1 No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters L1 Yes YES Permanent torque control LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 Torque control If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Speed regulation AJ Torque ref channel No nO Not assigned zero torque reference 11 11 Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted 100 of the reference corresponds to 300 of the rated torque o Ej o El Al Oo 1 Torque ref sign No nO Function inactive LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the torque sign is the same as the reference If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the to
126. AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCO Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Oo Oo Oo RV Inhibition O No nO O Yes YES Inhibition of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID summing input etc is interpreted as a zero reference 0 Hz Stop Key priority estes O No nO O Yes YES Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as the command channel Press and hold down ENT for 2 seconds in order for any change in the assignment of Stop Key priority PSt to be taken into account This will be a freewheel stop If the active command channel is the graphic dis
127. ANopen regardless of configuration C301 C301 to C310 C310 With a communication card in I O profile IO configuration C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card regardless of configuration C401 C401 to C410 C410 With Controller Inside card in I O profile IO configuration C411 C411 to C415 C415 With Controller Inside card regardless of configuration CD00 Cd00 to CD10 Cd10 In VO profile IO configuration CD11 Cd11 to CD15 Cd15 Regardless of configuration Note In I O profile IO configuration 111 cannot be accessed and if 2 3 wire control tCC page 89 3 wire 3C LI2 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed either A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Inactive communication channels are not monitored no lock following malfunction in the event of a communication bus failure Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C415 will not pose a risk in the event of the failure of the associated communication bus Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 124 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Adjustment range 1 Ref 1 channel AH 11 Al1 Analog input AI2 AI2 Analog input AI3
128. AOSt Voltage 100 or Voltage n10U Scaling AO3 min 0 to 100 0 0 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO3 max 0 to 100 0 96 100 0 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO3 Filter to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering 114 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal see 6 MONITORING CONFIG menu and viewed via the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs this alarm group is activated Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Selection to be made from the following list LI6 PTC al PLA 16 PTC probe alarm PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 Ext fault EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm slipping al AnA Slipping alarm I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 66 Freq Th att FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq thres
129. APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Counter wobble Master drive Slave drive Reel of yarn Synchronization Gearbox Main shaft Winding motor Thread guide Thread Gearbox Thread guide motor Cam The Counter wobble function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the Traverse control function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor trH and trL see page 210 Two motors must be used one master and one slave The master controls the speed of the yarn guide the slave controls the winding speed The function assigns the slave a speed profile which is in antiphase to that of the master This means that synchronization is required using one of the master s logic outputs and one of the slave s logic inputs Run command on master and slave Traverse control command on master and slave ed Yarn guide motor trH speed trL master drive tSY SnC synchronization t trH trL Winding motor speed slave drive 208 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Connection of synchronization I O Master drive Slave drive SnCO LOe O Lle SnCl The starting conditions for the function are Bas
130. APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has been traveled after the slowdown limit switch On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is tripped the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance This function is useful in applications where one manual reset overtravel limit switch is common to both directions It will then only respond to ensure safety if the distance is exceeded The stop limit switch retains priority in respect of the function The Deceleration type ASF parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described below Frequency 4 Deceleration type dSF Standard Std Slowdown frequency ___1 nei Distance A B 5 A Slowdown limit switch reached Automatic stop at a distance Stop distance Std Frequency 4 g Deceleration type dSF Optimized OPt Slowdown frequency eg Distance Ee Note If the deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed If the direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the parame
131. ASHx ASLx Lower limit of the assigned parameter Application example 1 The value of the signed motor torque at the AO2 output is to be transferred with 10 V with a range of 2 Tr to 2 Tr The parameter Sign torque Stq varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque or a range of 6 times the rated torque Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must modify the lower limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 6 16 7 new value lower limit range x ASL2 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 100 6 83 3 96 new value lower limit range x ASH2 Application example 2 The value of the motor current at the AO2 output is to be transferred with 0 20 mA range 2 In motor In motor being the equivalent of a 0 8 In drive The parameter motor OCr varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current or a range of 2 5 times the rated drive current Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must not modify the lower limit which therefore remains at its factory setting of 096 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper limit by 0 5x the rated motor torque or 100 100 5 80 new value lower limit range x ASH2 110 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 AO1 assignment jet ted ied re e ed S Fe s E e E
132. AULT MANAGEMENT 232 dad ENCODER FAULT 233 E hg TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT 233 FREQUENCY METER 235 dl d DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT 237 ae P DB RES PROTECTION 238 BUF BU PROTECTION 238 bak AUTO TUNING FAULT 238 PP f CARDS PAIRING 239 LFF FALLBACK SPEED 240 reb RAMP DIVIDER 240 gt DC INJECTION 240 1755855 12 2009 217 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt The parameters in the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped PTC probes 3 sets of PTC probes can be managed by the drive in order to protect the motors 1 logic input LI6 converted for this use by switch SW2 on the control card e 1 each of the 2 option cards VW3A3201 and VW3A3202 Each of these sets of PTC probes is monitored for the following faults Motor overheating Sensor break fault Sensor short circuit fault Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via 124 calculation performed by the drive the two types of protection can be combined 218 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting L
133. Al2 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCO Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted A Speed input 1 1 to 100 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input The parameter cannot be accessed if Speed ref assign FP No nO 21 J Auto Manual assign O No nO The PID is always active O LIH Li1 See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the PID is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 manual operation is active Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 3 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups No nO 1 Manual reference Manual speed input The parameter can be accessed if Auto Manual assign PAU is not No nO O No nO Not assigned fu
134. Al2 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 1755855 12 2009 95 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AI3 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input in order to check for example for compatibility problems AI3 Type Current 0 A Read only parameter cannot be configured O Current 0 A Current input I AI3 min value 0 to 20 0 mA L1 AI3 max value 0 to 20 0 mA 2 AIS filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering 2 AI3 range 0 100 POS O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 4 20 mA input 4 mA corresponds to reference 100 12 mA corresponds to reference 0 20 mA corresponds to reference 100 Since AI3 is in physical terms a bidirectional input the 10096 nEG configuration must only be used if the signal applied is unidirectional A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration 2 AI3 Interm point X 010 100 0 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Min value CrL3 if the range is 0 100 max value CrH3 AI3 min value 096 corresponds t
135. D Mb HMI frames nb Mb HMI CRC errors Communication via CANopen RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 CANopen MAP RUN LED Q ERR LED 69 PDO1 IMAGE PDO2 IMAGE PDO3 IMAGE Canopen NMT state Number of TX PDO Number of RX PDO Error code RX Error Counter TX Error Counter PDO images are only visible if CANopen has been enabled address other than OFF and if the PDOs are active PDO configuration using the network tool Some PDOs cannot be used RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A PDO1 IMAGE Received PDO1 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO1 2 Received PDO1 3 Received PDO1 4 Transmit PDO1 1 Transmit PDO1 2 Transmit PDO1 3 Transmit PDO1 4 RUN Term 50 00Hz PDO2 IMAGE Received PDO2 1 Received PDO2 2 Received PDO2 3 Received PDO2 4 80A FDBA Hex Transmit PDO2 2 Transmit PDO2 3 Transmit PDO2 4 RUN Term 50 00Hz PDO3 IMAGE Received PDO3 1 Received PDO3 2 80A Received PDO3 3 Received PDO3 4 Transmit PDO3 1 Transmit PDO3 2 Transmit PDO3 3 Transmit PDO3 4 1755855 12 2009 49 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication continued RUN Term 450 00Hz 80 Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5 Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230Hex RUN W4325
136. Decimal without sign Word 2 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 2 Format of word 2 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 3 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 3 Format of word 3 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 4 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 4 Format of word 4 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign It will then be possible to view the selected words in the COMMUNICATION MAP submenu of the 1 2 MONITORING menu Example Term 35 00Hz 80 COMMUNICATION MAP F230 Hex 260 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 7 DISPLAY CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access parameters Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MO
137. Delay 1 o b m h RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE ENT Al1 assignment 9 87 Ref 1 channel Al2 H 2 35 mA Forced local Torque reference min value max value Code gt gt Quick RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 Term 50 00Hz 80 LO1 assignment ENT G State 0 Ri R2 LO 69 6 Q LO1 delay time 69 State 1 LO1 active at 0000000000000010b LO1 holding time RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE ENT 1 assignment AO1 E 9 87 V Motor freq AO1 min output AO1 max output AO 1 Filter RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A ENT RP assignment 25 45 kHz Frequency ref 225 kHz RP min value RP max value RP filter Code gt gt Quick Quick 46 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Controller Inside card I O Term 50 00Hz 80A PROG CARD I O MAP PROG CARD Al MAP PROG CARD LO MAP PROG CARD AO MAP State 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 LI51 52 LI53 1154 LI55 1156 57 1158 m State1 m RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD AI MAP 0 000 mA State 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD LO MAP LO51 LO52 LO53 LO54 LO55 LO56 M state1 4 Term 50 00Hz 80A PROG CARD AO MAP 0 000 mA 9 87 V Code gt gt Quick Move from one screen to another from PROG CARD LI
138. E 2 lt q t on M3 co eu Er 22 Ed E Er Eu aS 22 r5H5 74 r5d 172 r5F 220 r5L 180 ron Z5 rSns 76 p E 212 SEL 172 P Ei 212 rEH 51 53 184 rEr 211 SAE 136 5H3 136 SAF 196 SAL 196 SAT 196 SAE 226 SCL i2 5251 250 Selg l 60 143 162 60 143 Sdd 233 SFC 56 SFd SFr 61 82 S IE 56 SLL 232 SLP 59 74 5nL 211 SOP 83 SPE 63 148 SAG 63 148 SP4 63 148 SHS 63 148 288 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Index of parameter codes Code Page 5 p d E 2 E z a E tc O E z lt o lt 2 2 2 T Q o a E lt a 2 a 5 2 2 tc gt o 4 gt E E cam ono eso ol So les cle So B Su Zo i c un 2 a lt q t ow M au 22 un 22 Ed m SS eS T2 5 63 148 T 63 148 63 148 SPY 63 148 5P IU 63 148 Si HJ 63 148 SP I 63 148 5 1 63 148 SP 63 148 15 64 148 SP 64 148 SPd ils SPL 56 SPI 153 SPE 183 Sim 64 152 55b 233 SEd 197 229 233 228 SET 150 229 SEE 141 SUL 83 ERI 55 138 ERA 55 13
139. E MENU 1 2 MONITORING MAP 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 3 SETTINGS 3 OPEN SAVE 5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive 1755855 12 2009 45 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal This menu can be used to display the inputs outputs the drive internal states and values and the communication data and values RUN Term 450 00Hz 80A MAP L 1 PROG CARD I O MAP I O of the Controller Inside card if it is present COMMUNICATION MAP Communication data and values Alarm groups HMI Frequency ref p gt Drive internal drive states and values see page 51 RUN 00 DOHZS 280A Move from one screen to another SSIS BUT rina from LOGIC INPUT MAP ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE to FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE LOGIC OUTPUT MAP by turning the navigation button ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE State 0 Term 50 00Hz 80A Access to the selected input or RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A LOGIC INPUT MAP output configuration assignment m LI2 LIS 4 LI5 LI6 LI7 orward State 1 m Press ENT Pre Fluxing LI8 119 L110 Li11 12 L3 14 On
140. FIG The drive may contain up to 3 configurations which can be saved using the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu page 248 Each of these configurations can be activated remotely enabling adaptation to 20r 3 different motors or mechanisms multimotor mode 20r 3 different configurations for a single motor multiconfiguration mode The two switching modes cannot be combined Note The following conditions MUST be observed Switching may only take place when stopped drive locked If a switching request is sent during operation it will not be executed until the next stop Inthe event of motor switching the following additional conditions apply When the motors are switched the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration this being the definitive configuration option and communication cards Failure to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on an Incorrect config CFF fault Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode 1 8 SETTINGS SEt 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O 1 6 COMMAND CtL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn with the exception of the MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function to be configured once only 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 13 USE
141. I Filter must AFE Active Front End TN TT always be set to always be set to AIC Active Infeed Converter ungrounded ungrounded LFM Line Filter Module S position 50 position 92 LFC Line Filter Choke ASR 216 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00 2 0A ENT 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 9 COMMUNICATION 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 1 6 COMMAND With integrated display terminal Summary of functions eee PEL PTC MANAGEMENT 219 Displays the state of the drive Sob FAULT RESET 220 Aer AUTOMATIC RESTART 221 Pip CATCH ON THE FLY 222 Pie MOTOR THERMAL PROT 224 OUTPUT PHASE LOSS 224 INPUT PHASE LOSS 225 OHL DRIVE OVERHEAT 225 ERE THERMAL ALARM STOP 226 EXTERNAL FAULT 227 HShe UNDERVOLTAGE MGT 228 IGBT TESTS 229 LEE 4 20mA LOSS 230 InH FAULT INHIBITION 231 ELLE COM F
142. I6 PTC probe Can be accessed if switch SW2 on the control card is set to PTC No nO Not used O Always AS PTC probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply O Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected O Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected PTC1 probe Dore Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted No nO Not used O Always AS PTC probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply O Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected O Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected Q PTC2 probe No nO Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted No nO Not used O Always AS PTC probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply O Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected O Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected 1755855 12 2009 219 This document
143. IE xx OPTION 2 FIPIO CARD Vx x IE xx GRAPHIC TERMINAL GRAPHIC S Vx x IE xx ENCODER RS 422 The 1 11 IDENTIFICATION menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal This is a read only menu that cannot be configured It enables the following information to be displayed Drive reference power rating and voltage Drive software version Drive serial number Type of options present with their software version 1755855 12 2009 247 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS With graphic display terminal 0A 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS ENT 1 11 IDENTIFICATION ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS Macro Conf 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 13 USER MENU 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up The 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu is used to Replace the current configuration with the factory configuration or a previously saved configuration All or part of the current configuration can be replaced select a group of parameters in order to select the menus you wish to load with the selected source configuration Save the current configuration to a file 248 1755855 12 2009
144. IPMENT OPERATION Check that the delay set does not pose a risk or lead to undesired operation The relative order in which these inputs are taken into account may be modified according to the delay values of the various logic inputs and thus lead to unintended operation Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above up to LI6 LI10 or 1114 depending on whether or not option cards have been inserted 90 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input The minimum and maximum input values in volts mA etc are converted to in order to adapt the references to the application Minimum and maximum input values The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 0 and the maximum value to a reference of 100 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Reference Reference A 100 100 1 1 Current or 1 Current or voltage or voltage or frequency frequency 0 1 i input 0 input Min value Max value 20 mA or Max value Min value 20 mA or CrLx or CrHx or 10 V or CrHx or CrLx or 10 V or ULxorPIL
145. If no operator inputs are made switches to Display automatically 10 seconds later the display will vary depending on the selected configuration Users can return to MAIN MENU by pressing ENT or ESC mm ATV71HU22N4 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config 1 or if the Controller Inside card is present 3 seconds RDY Term 38 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Modbus add Prg C 17 DATE TIME SETTINGS 10 seconds RDY Term 38 2 0A Frequency ref 38 Hz ENT 9 515 cee 221 aes Acceleration 2 12 58s Deceleration 2 13 455 Code lt lt gt gt Quick ESC RDY Term 38 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS RDY Term 0 00Hz oA Menu selected 1 3 SETTINGS Power up menu Ramp increment 01 page 265 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 23 Graphic display terminal Programming Example of accessing a parameter Accessing the acceleration ramp RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0 Term 0 00 2 0A A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Acceleration 1 1 SIMPLY START Ramp increment 01 1 2 MONITORING Acceleration S 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 Code
146. L OPEN SAVE AS With integrated display terminal Power up 252 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 3 OPEN SAVE AS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE 5 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Code Open To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive SAVE 5 To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 3 OPEN 7 SAVE AS ENT OPEN DOWNLOAD GROUP See details on OPEN File 1 Used SANE AS the next page Drive menu Motor parameters Communication Code Quick Prog control inside card Code lt lt gt gt Quick cge Note Opening an empty file has no effect ENT RDY Term 0 00 2 0A DOWNLOAD PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT continue ENT Term 0 00 2 0A SAVE AS RDY Term 0 00 2 0A DOWNLOAD Used ENT p 100 Free IN PROGRESS E Saving to a used file deletes and replaces the RDY Term 0 00Hz OA configuration contained in DOWNLOAD this file DONE ENT or ESC to continue Various messages may appear when the download is requested IN PROGRESS DONE Error messages if download not possible Motor paramete
147. L 4 PASSWORD E Ud D JF JF3 JFH JOF IGE JOG JPF L IHtoL IYA 52 L IdioL IHd LAF LAr LAS LbH Loe 67 LbE I LbLte LbE3 LbF LCe LEr 51 53 LCE 195 74 LES 190 LEE LFA 75 EFF 240 LFL3 LFN 16 L 1561 52 L 1502 52 LLC 19 Lol 106 LU ld 10 LU IH 106 LUIS 10 E qe lo G Jo Jo qe qe 9 IE I D D gt D SIN IN IN Ia N gt 1755855 12 2009 283 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG dems 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT F Un 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT pe 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL diz amp 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1 SIMPLY START EON 5 1 2 MONITORING SUP 1 3 SETTINGS SEE 1 6 COMMAND CEL 4 PASSWORD C Od D Loe LO d LOH 1025 103 1034 LOJH Logs Loy Loud LU H LOYS 167 LPe 167 195 mA LSP 44 56 136 nAgq 136 Nee 51153 64 51 58 nERI 242 nlAe 242 nCAJ 242 nCAY 242 nClAS 242
148. LICATION FUNCT FUn High speed hoisting This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads It authorizes operation at constant power in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without exceeding the rated motor current The speed remains limited by the High speed HSP parameter page 44 The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself Principle Frequency High speed HSP Rated motor frequency FrS Torque max Tr Rated motor torque Torque Rated motor frequency FrS High speed HSP 168 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn There are 2 possible operating modes Speed reference mode The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step that is set so that the drive can measure the load Current limitation mode The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in motor mode in the Ascending direction only For the Descending direction operation is always in Speed reference mode Speed reference mode Ascend or Descend command Reference FrS OSP Frequency HSP Calculated limit 4 FrS 4 OSP OSP Adjustable speed step for load measurement tOS Load
149. Li11 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO profile C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO profile C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO profile C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO profile CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile profile can be switched without logic inputs The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1 sti s 21 Example 2 wire control operation tCC 2C Motor Ramp Ramp frequency i DEC DE2 forced to 0 1 s Reference JGF reference 0 JGF reference LI JOG 1 _ Forward 4 1 x app E 1 Reverse 4 LLL dL d lad 1 Jog frequency 1 0 to 10 Hz The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Reference in jog operation I Jog delay 1 0to2 0s The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 145 This d
150. MOTOR CONTROL drC Load sharing parameters that can be accessed at expert level Principle Torque reference Reference Speed Ramp Speed loop Balancing K Filter LBC LBF LBC1 LBC2 LBC3 The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed with two factors K1 and K2 K K1 x K2 K1 Speed LBC1 LBC2 K2 4 Torque torque x 1 LBC3 I LBC 86 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Correction min spd 0 to 999 9 Hz The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Minimum speed for load correction in Hz Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to prevent correction at very low speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor Correction min spd 0 1 LbC1 0 1 at 1000 Hz 1 Correction max spd The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied 0 to 300 2 Torque offset The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Minimum torque for load correction as a of the rated torque Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant J Sharing filter 100 m
151. Motor control type Ctt page 71 m FVC SdC1 Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj Sac2 level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 tdC2 are not accessible Only Auto DC inj time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time tdC1 tdc2 t Run command Speed 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate 60 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range e g Switching freq According to rating According to rating Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive ATV71H or W the rating power and voltage and the configuration of the Sinus filter OFI and Motor surge limit SUL parameters page 83 If the value is less than 2 kHz Current Limitation CLI and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 61 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with
152. N On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support When PIN code 2 COd2 is not set to OFF the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu is the only one visible Then if PIN code 2 COd2 is set to OFF drive unlocked all menus are visible If the display settings are modified in 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu and if PIN code 2 COd2 is not set to OFF the visibility configured is kept Then if PIN code 2 COd2 is set to OFF drive unlocked the visibility configured in 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu is kept _ Upload rights Permitted ULrO Read or copy the current configuration to the drive O Permitted ULr0 The current drive configuration can always be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PowerSuite O Not allowed ULr1 The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PowerSuite if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered 1 Download rights Unlock dLr1 Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive Locked dLr0 A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an
153. NITORING Gur 1 3 SETTINGS 1 6 COMMAND CEL 1 9 COMMUNICATION mms 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS sig See 4 PASSWORD E Ud FC m 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FOF 4 FOL 95 FE 1 no Fr Ib Frg zu D FrH EES Fr55 Ko Fry FSE ES E FEd 1 GFS L IE LPE BE HLS H5U H5P lbr Ia Is 1 10 IdH Id Cl 240 IdL2 Is KO Ico el Id r1 InH ET 4 In5P c D IPL NO Ird E E IEH JdEL 4 IS l5 5 iO ID 10 x D 282 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Gems 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT F Un 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT CE 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL sig See diz amp 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1 SIMPLY START EON 5 1 2 MONITORING Gur 1 3 SETTINGS MEIEELUI 1 6 COMMAND EE
154. NITORING CONFIG ENT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG BBES BB 7 1 USER PARAMETERS Customization of 1 to 15 parameters 7 2 USER MENU Creation of a customized menu 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Adjustment of the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display terminal parameters stored in the terminal rather than in the drive Choice of the menu displayed on power up 1755855 12 2009 261 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 7 DISPLAY CONFIG If Return std name Yes the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored RDY Term 0 00Hz OA PARAMETER SELECTION PARAMETER SELECTION 7 1 USER PARAMETERS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Selection of 1 to 15 parameters Return std name No ENTREES Ramp increment to be customized PARAMETER SELECTION 1 2 MONITORING ENT Acceleration CUSTOMIZED SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration USER MENU NAME 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 DEVICE NAME 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 SERVICE MESSAGE I CONFIGURATION 0 CONFIGURATION 1 Note The 1 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or lt lt CONFIGURATION 2 RDY Term 0 00Hz RDY Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List ATV SERIAL NUMBER ENT List of customized parameters Acce
155. Note Ifthe setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 61 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range FLU 2 Motor fluxing No FnO Fal O Not cont FnC Non continuous mode O Continuous FCt Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection AdC page 143 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 141 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVCI or FVC F
156. O POSITIONING BY SENSORS 196 NLP PARAM SET SWITCHING 199 NNE MULTIMOTORS CONFIG 204 EnL AUTO TUNING BY LI 204 TRAVERSE CONTROL 210 rF EVACUATION 212 HFF HALF FLOOR 213 JEDO DC BUS SUPPLY 214 1 REGEN CONNECTION 215 1755855 12 2009 129 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn The parameters in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped Note Compatibility of functions The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible If there is an incompatibility between functions the first function configured will prevent the others being configured Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs A single input can activate several functions at the same time reverse and 279 ramp for example The user must therefore ensure that these functions can be used at the same time It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at Advanced AdU and Expert EPr levels Before assigning a command reference or functi
157. OPL no Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 71 A CAUTION UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0 2 times the rated drive current Provide an alternative means of thermal protection Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Using motors in parallel Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 71 A CAUTION UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 16 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Setup Preliminary recommendations ATV71eeeY Network which presents often under voltage To assure an optimal running of an ATV71eeeY used on network which presents often under voltage network voltage contained between 425 V and 446 V it is necessary to adjust Prevention level UPL 383 V 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu see page 229 Using motor with nominal voltage lower than drive supply voltage Configure Vector Control 2pt UC2 Yes YES 1 4 c MOTOR CONTROL drC
158. R MENU USER CONFIG The name of the configuration specified by the user in the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode As in multimotor mode except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations Rated current Thermal current Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated speed Rated power compensation Slip compensation Synchronous motor parameters Type of thermal protection Thermal state The auto tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode Type of motor control Note No other menus or parameters be switched 1755855 12 2009 201 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Transfer of a drive configuration to another one with graphic display terminal when the drive uses MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function Let A be the source drive and B the drive addressed In this example switching are controled by logic input Connect graphic display terminal to the drive A Put logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 and LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 0 Download configuration 0 in a file of graphic display terminal example file 1 of the graphic display terminal Put logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 to 1 and leave logic input LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 0 Download configuration 1 in a file of graphic displa
159. Selection of the fallback speed Ramp divider 1 The ramp that is enabled dEC or dE2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 a Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 DC inject level 2 Injection current activated by logic input selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 Oto ees 086 Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only Can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection dCl 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive n
160. Set to 0 3 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 4 Brake engage frequency bEn in open loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 5 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage 1755855 12 2009 157 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Frequency 4 Brake logic control horizontal movement in open loop mode 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn i EAEE EEEE SEA DEE EE E SE E Hulyo07 9 uonoefu e S S gt o 79 B 2 o uU i LL 1 14 DE pesce Iac ce esce eee ie penc eoe g 2 TE b i de enbJo eun ne Aere f Eee cc paren nes h a 1 xn ON ie UN T et 5 68 5 5 E dnas c ovo S 8 gd 8 8 B 55 5 3 3 BE c E CT rs D c o o 5 o8 c T o 5 8 Ba 85 s 5 B 28 9992522 E 2 20 929 c E 5 9 o c o am Oo Gor g a 2 a
161. Support It can only be accessed in Expert mode Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used the other must remain set to OFF OFF Note When the unlock code is entered the user access code appears The following items are access protected Return to factory settings 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu The channels and parameters protected by the 1 13 USER MENUJ as well as the menu itself e The custom display settings 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu 1755855 12 2009 255 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 4 PASSWORD COd Name Description Adjustment range CSE 1 Status Unlocked ULC Information parameter cannot be modified O Locked LC The drive is locked by a password O Unlocked ULC The drive is not locked by a password LJ PIN code 1 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF 15 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value ON On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 LJ PIN code 2 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF Parameter can only be accessed in Expert mode 274 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value O
162. UC If Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVCI FUC or Sync mot SYn the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor n Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up n Not cont FnC mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment DLC page 161 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect 1 Low speed time out 0 to 999 9 s 0s Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 44 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor will restart if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time Note If Low speed time out tLS is not 0 Type of stop Stt page 141 is forced to Ramp stop
163. ULn Motor thermal state tHr Drv thermal state tHd DBR thermal state tHb Consumption APH Run time rtH Power on time PtH IGBT alarm counter tAC PID reference rPC PID feedback rPF PID error rPE PID Output rPO Date Time CLO 006 Config active CnFS Utilised param set CFPS ALARMS ALr OTHER STATE SSt Current alarm group numbers in Hz Frequency reference via the graphic display terminal can be accessed if the function has been configured as a process value PID reference via graphic display terminal can be accessed if the function has been configured as a of the rated torque Torque reference via graphic display terminal as a can be accessed if Multiplier ref MA2 MA3 page 136 has been assigned in Hz as a of the rated torque can be accessed if the function has been configured in Hz in Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted otherwise 0 appears in Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 235 in in Hz The parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA Yes YES see page 81 in rpm in V as a of the rated power as a of the rated torque in V Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped as a as a as a can only be accessed on high rating drives in Wh kWh or MWh accumulated consump
164. access code which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded Unlock dLr1 A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the drive is unlocked access code entered or is not protected by an access code Not allowed dLr2 Download not authorized LH Lock unlock dLr3 Combination of Locked drv dLrO and Unlock dLr1 256 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 6 MONITORING CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation RUN Term 40 00Hz 80A 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 6 2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line the first 2 cannot be modified 6 2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode digital values or bar graph format 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG Selection of the words displayed and their format 1755855 12 2009 257 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co
165. ach input Std Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Only one function can be assigned to each input AdU Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Several functions can be assigned to each input EPr Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input 32 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal integrated display terminal Graphic display terminal Integrated display terminal Access level 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU LAC Access level Od Password 5 Simply start 5 UP Monitoring SEE Settings FE 5 Factory settings 5 User menu Basic 5 o o e g Oo A single function can be assigned to each input A single function can be assigned to 2 each input d T 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL dr E Motor control o L 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 0 VO configuration vo 7 c 1 6 COMMAND E EL Command 5 E c 1 7 APPLICATION
166. actory setting up to ATV71HD45M3X ATV71HD75N4 and ATV71HD90Y Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency 12 Motor surge limit No nO This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications NEMA motors Japanese motors Spindle motors Rewound motors No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Function active This parameter is forced to No nO if Sinus filter previous page Yes YES This parameter can remain No nO for 230 400 V motors used at 230 V or if the length of cable between the drive and the motor does not exceed 4m with unshielded cables 10 m with shielded cables 10 us LI Volt surge limit opt Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals Can be accessed if Motor surge limit SUL Yes YES Set to 6 8 or 10 us according to the following table The value of the SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used It is defined to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the SOP parameter and the length of the cable between the drive and the motor For longer cable lengths a sinus filter or a dV dt protection filter must be used For motors in parallel the su
167. after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return to No nO and must be repeated Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 238 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Note During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Not done tAb Auto tuning status for information only cannot be modified O Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor O Pending PEnd Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed O In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress O Failed FAIL Auto tuning has failed O Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor Output Ph rotation AbC O ABC AbC Forward ACh O ACB ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring
168. ake sure that 2 preset PID ref Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this function L1 No nO Function inactive O LIN Li1 O See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active 2 preset PID ref 1 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 2 Pr2 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 3 preset PID ref 1 600 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 4 preset PID ref 1 900 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 181 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Torque regulation Speed refere
169. ameplate 8 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 240 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT ENT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 9 COMMUNICATION E eje Misi MI OME 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 3 OPEN SAVE 5 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up 1755855 12 2009 241 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Scan IN1 address Address of the 1 input word Scan IN2 address Address of the 274 input word Scan IN3 address Address of the 3 9 input word Scan IN4 address Address of the 47 input word Scan IN5 address Address of the 5 input word Scan IN6 address Address of the 6 input word Scan IN7 address Address of the 77 input word Scan IN8 address Address of
170. ameter or decreases the displayed value Enters a menu or parameter or saves the displayed parameter or value Cg Note Pressing v does not store the selection Press and hold down 22 s w to scroll through the data quickly Save and store the selection ENT The display flashes when a value is stored Normal display with no fault present and no startup 43 0 Display of the parameter selected in the SUP menu default selection motor frequency CLI Current limit CtL Controlled stop on input phase loss dCb DC injection braking in progress FLU Motor fluxing in progress FSt Fast stop nLP No line power no line supply on L1 L2 L3 nSt Freewheel stop Obr Auto adapted deceleration PrA Power Removal function active drive locked rdY Drive ready SOC Controlled output cut in progress tUn Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault 28 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Integrated display terminal Accessing menus Menus Power up Y xxx Displays the state of the drive eo e ETE Wd 6 oi LC o fo fcc worn connor 7 more e ce c one fece FAULT MANAGEMENT J fon meroms
171. ameters Press the All button again to 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 deselect all the parameters 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 ae All 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT No selections can be made in this screen if there are no parameters PROTECTED PARAMS 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION PROTECTED PARAMS JOG JOG Jog frequency Jog delay Note The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not therefore displayed for the selected channels 264 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Keypad contrast 0 to 100 Adjustment of contrast on graphic display unit 1 Keypad stand by Configures and adjusts the stand by mode of the graphic display unit O No No stand by mode O 1 to 10 Adjusts the time during which the terminal is to remain idle before stand by mode is triggered in minutes After this idle time the display backlight turns off and the contrast is reduced The screen returns to normal operation when a key or the navigation button is pressed It also returns to normal operation if the terminal exits the normal display mode for example if a fault occurs Main menu 1 Power up menu Choice of
172. ameters can be selected Example PARAM BAR SELECT MONITORING 258 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 6 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Display value type O Digital Display of one or two digital values on the screen factory configuration O Bar graph Display of one or two bar graphs on the screen O List Display a list of between one and five values on the screen 2 PARAMETER SELECTION Ej A o E Ei Li o Li E El o Alarm groups Frequency ref Torque reference Output frequency Motor current ENA avg speed Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state Consumption Run time Power on time IGBT alarm counter PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output 02 to 06 Config active Utilised param set Selectthe parameter s using ENT a PARAMETER SELECTION MONITORING Examples include Display of 2 digital values RUN Term 35 00Hz 80 Motor speed 1250 rpm Motor current 80A can only be accessed if Display value type List in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration as a in Hz in A in Hz in rpm in V in W
173. an be accessed if the function has been asa process configured value Multiplication coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 page 136 has been assigned Frequency ref Hz Torque reference Can be accessed if the function has been configured Output frequency Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted otherwise 0 appears Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FgF function page 235 Hz Motor current A ENA avg SPEED The parameter can be accessed if EnA YES see page 81 Hz Motor speed Motor voltage V Motor power Motor torque Line voltage Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped V Motor thermal state 96 Drv thermal state 96 DBR thermal state Can be accessed on high rating drives only 96 Power consumption Wh kWh or MWh Run time Length of time the motor has been turned on seconds minutes or Power on time Length of time the drive has been turned on hours IGBT alarm counter Length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active seconds PID reference Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value PID feedback Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID error Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID Output Can be ac
174. and the min Output UOLx corresponds to an average value between the upper and lower limits 0 for a signed and symmetrical parameter such as in the example below Parameter assigned A Upper limit 10V Voltage Min Output Max Output 10V Output UOLx UOHx ERE Lower limit 1755855 12 2009 109 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Scaling of the assigned parameter The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits by means of two parameters for each analog output These parameters are given in 100 corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter so 100 upper limit lower limit For example Sign torque Stq which varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque 100 corresponds to 6 times the rated torque The parameter Scaling AOx min ASLx modifies the lower limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 0 factory setting does not modify the lower limit The parameter Scaling AOx max ASHx modifies the upper limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 100 factory setting does not modify the upper limit Scaling AOx ASLx must always be lower than Scaling AOx max ASHx Upper limit of the assigned parameter 100 New scale
175. anged As these differ from logic output characteristics it is important to ensure that they are compatible with the intended application Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 103 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor control O Input cont LLC Line contactor control O Output cont OCC Output contactor control E L1 End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization O DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control 1 DO1 delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true 001 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic L1 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments 2 DO1 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt
176. ar the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault This parameter is only accessible in this menu on ATV71H037M3 to HU75MS drives used with a single phase supply According to drive 1 Rated motor power According to drive rating Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 1 Rated motor volt According to drive rating Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate to 690 V J Rated mot current 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 ATV71eeeM3 100 to 240 V ATV71eeeN4 200 to 480 V ATV71eeeS6X 400 to 600 V ATV71eeeY 400 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr Rated motor current given on the nameplate J Rated motor freq 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 1 Rated motor speed 0 to 60000 RPM Hz According to drive rating Rated motor speed given on the nameplate 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal calculate the rated speed as follows 100 slip as a 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in Hz 60 Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed Synchro
177. arameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 3 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 0 or 1 2 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1 Note Do not modify the parameters in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu because any modifications made in this menu 1 8 SETTINGS SEt will be lost on the next power up The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP menu on the active configuration Note Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display terminal by PowerSuite or via the bus or communication network If the function has not been configured the MLP menu and the PS1 PS2 PS3 submenus will not appear 198 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A2 2 paramete
178. arameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 65 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description z 1 Brake engage time Adjustment range to 5 00 s Factory setting Os See page 162 Brake engage time brake response time Jump at reversal Auto AUtO 0 to 10 Hz Auto AUtO See page 163 Time to restart 0 00 to 15 00 s See page 163 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence Motoring torque lim See page 186 0 to 300 100 Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 186 Gen torque lim See page 186 0 to 300 100 Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 186 Traverse freq high See page 210 Traverse freq low See page 210 Quick step High See page 210 Quick step Low See page 210 Current threshold Current threshold for attained CtA function assigned to ar High torque thd High cur
179. as 0 doen Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ref memo ass O No nO Function inactive O LI Li1 to LI6 116 L1 LI7 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic l O card has been inserted O LH 1 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Assignment to a logic input Function active if the assigned input is at 1 1755855 12 2009 153 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Motor fluxing No FnO E LI Not cont FnC Non continuous mode Continuous FCt Continuous mode This option is not possible if Auto DC injection AdC page 143 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 141 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVCI CUC or FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVCI FVC FUC or Sync SYn or SVC V at and above ATV71HD55M3X ATV71HD90N4 and ATV71HC11Y the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor In Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up In Not cont FnC mod
180. as a in V as a as a as a in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms as a as a as a in Hz Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted CNFO 1 or 2 see page 201 can only be accessed if Display value type List SET1 2 or 3 see page 199 can only be accessed if Display value type List X then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of 5 values RUN Min Term 35 00Hz Motor speed 1250 rpm 80A RUN Term 35 00Hz MONITORING Frequency ref Motor current Motor speed Motor thermal state Drv thermal state 80A 50 1Hz 80A Motor current 1250 rpm 80A 1755855 12 2009 259 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 6 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Word 1 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 1 Format of word 1 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned
181. at can be modified during operation or when stopped 186 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Yes YES i Analog limit act The parameter can be accessed if Torque ref assign tAA is not No nO O Yes YES The limitation depends on the input assigned by Torque ref assign tAA LI Li1 See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 The limitation is specified by the Motoring torque lim tLIM and Gen torque lim parameters tLIG if Torque limit activ is not No nO No limitation if Torque limit activ No nO If the assigned input or bit is at 1 The limitation depends on the input assigned by Torque ref assign tAA Note If Torque limitation tLA and Torque ref assign tAA are enabled at the same time the lowest value will be taken into account 1755855 12 2009 187 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Current limit 2 No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the first current limitation is ac
182. ate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 230 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Parameter can be accessed in Expert mode Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Fault inhibit assign To assign fault inhibit press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage L1 No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 fault monitoring is active
183. ation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 143 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 Auto DC inj time 2 0 to 30 s 2 d standstill injection time The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC Yes YES Operation Note When Motor control type Ctt page 71 l FVC FUC Sdct Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj 5902 level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 0 tdC2 cannot be accessed only Auto DC inj time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time Run command Speed 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 144 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range JOG Pulse operation The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals Selecting the assigned logic input or bit activates the function No nO Not assigned L11 L11 to LI6 116 LI7 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted LI 11
184. ayed selection D Menu Parameter Value or assignment OKO dEL Next parameter 15 1 flash nc kiko he save D Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter Example List of group 1 alarms in INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG tr C3 EEG Alarm not selected Alarm selected The display flashes when a value is stored All the menus are drop down type menus which means that after the last parameter if you continue to press W you will return to the first parameter and conversely you can switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing A number of alarms can be selected by checking them as The digit on the right indicates H selected A not selected The same principle is used for all multiple selections 30 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC With graphic display terminal Basic Access to 5 menus only and access to 6 submenus only in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 2 ACCESS LEVEL MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU i D DRIVE MENU SISSE 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 3 SETTINGS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Standard Thi
185. back below 100 Motor therm level 1 Rone Ze 100 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay 1 Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm logic output or relay 1 Motors therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm logic output or relay 1 Overload fault mgt Freewheel YES Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 2 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 2 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with ce
186. bles Menu 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Code Name 2 3 wire control Factory setting 2 wire 2C Customer setting Macro configuration Start Stop StS Standard mot freq BO Hz 50 Rated motor power According to drive rating Rated motor volt According to drive rating Rated mot current According to drive rating Rated motor freq 50 Hz Rated motor speed According to drive rating Max frequency 60 Hz Output Ph rotation ABC Mot therm current According to drive rating Acceleration 3 0s Deceleration 3 0s Low speed 0 Functions assigned to I O High speed Inputs Functions assigned Inputs Functions assigned Outputs Outputs LO1 2 02 LI3 LOS Ll4 LO4 LI5 LI6 Al2 LI7 LI8 Al4 LI9 R1 LI10 R2 1111 R3 1112 R4 LI13 RP 1114 274 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com User settings tables Other parameters table to be created by the user Code Name Customer setting Code Name Customer setting 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electr
187. but in the manual for the bus or network used Communication Parameters Manual This manual describes The drive parameters with specific information for use via a bus or communication network The operating modes specific to communication state chart The interaction between communication and local control Manuals for Modbus CANopen Ethernet Profibus INTERBUS Uni Telway FIPIO and Modbus Plus etc These manuals describe the assembly connection to the bus or network signaling diagnostics and configuration of the communication specific parameters via the integrated display terminal or the graphic display terminal They also describe the communication services of the protocols ATV 58 58F ATV 71 Migration Manual This manual describes the differences between the Altivar 71 and the Altivar 58 58F and explains how to replace an Altivar 58 or 58F including how to replace drives communicating on a bus or a network ATV 78 ATV 61 71 Migration Manual This manual describes the differences between the Altivar 61 71 and Altivar 78 and explains how to replace an Altivar 78 1755855 12 2009 5 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Software enhancements Since the Altivar ATV 71 was first launched it has benefited from the addition of several new functions The software version has been updated to V3 3 The old versions can be replaced by this new one without any modificat
188. c 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Other configurations and settings In addition to the assignment of inputs outputs other parameters are assigned only in the Hoisting and Mast slave macro configurations Hoisting Movement type bSt Hoisting UEr page 161 Brake contact No nO page 161 Brake impulse bIP 2 No nO page 161 Brake release FW Ibr Rated mot current nCr page 161 Brake Release time brt 2 0 5 s page 162 Brake release freq blr Auto AUtO page 162 Brake engage freq bEn Auto AUto page 162 Brake engage time bEt 0 5 s page 162 Engage at reversal bEd No nO page 163 Jump at reversal JdC Auto AUtO page 163 Time to restart ttr 0 s page163 Current ramp time brr 0 s page 165 Low speed LSP Rated motor slip calculated by the drive page 44 Output Phase Loss OPL Yes YES page 224 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Catch on the fly FLr 2 No nO page 222 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Mast slave Motor control type Ctt SVC I page 71 Note These assignments are forced every time the macro configuration changes except for Motor control type Ctt for the Mast slave macro configuration if it is configured in FVC FUC Return to factory settings Returning
189. c 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Al2 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al2 in order to check for example for compatibility problems AI2 Type Current 0 A O Voltage 10U Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input Al2 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if Al2 Type Al2t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V Al2 min value The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Voltage 10U 0 to 20 0 mA Al2 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al2 Type Al2t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V Al2 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al2 Type Al2t Voltage 10U Al2 filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering Al2 range 0 100 POS O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 10096 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input 0 V corresponds to reference 100 5 V corresponds to reference 096 10 V corresponds to reference 100 Al2 Interm point X 0 to 100 Input delinearization point coordinate 096 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 100 Max value Min value 0 corresponds to 2 if the range is 100 100 100 corresponds to Max value
190. c input is assigned to the brake contact BRH b2 brH2 0 During the brake release sequence the reference is enabled at the end of the time Brake Release time brt During the brake engage sequence the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time brr at the end of the Brake engage time bEt BRH b2 brH2 1 When the brake is released the reference is enabled when the logic input changes to 1 When the brake is engaged the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time brr when the logic input changes to 0 A Run command Relay or 4 logic output bEt Torque gt Frequency 4 Current e b2 brH2 0 Logic input Brake contact 2 Torque Frequency 4 b lor Nk BRH b2 brH2 1 b3 In closed loop mode only Management of the absence of brake contact response if it is assigned O 0 0 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise the drive locks in a brF brake contact fault O 1 1 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise a bCA brake contact alarm is triggered and zero speed is maintained BRH b4 In closed loop mode only Activation of the speed loop at zero if a movement for which command has been given occurs
191. c output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the Reel time tbO 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 210 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Counter wobble O No nO Function not assigned LH L11 O See the assignment conditions on page 124 Synchronization input To be configured on the winding drive slave only 2 Sync wobble No nO Function not assigned LO1 L01 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 dO1 Analog output AC1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO Synchronization output To be configured on the yarn guide drive master only 1 Decrease ref speed 0 to 1600 Hz Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle LI Init traverse ctrl No nO Function not assigned
192. cessed if the PID function has been configured tIME dAY Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Config active CnFO 1 or 2 can be accessed if motor or configuration switching has been enabled see page 204 Utilised param set CFP1 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 199 1755855 12 2009 53 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 1 SIMPLY START MAIN MENU 1 2 MONITORING 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick With integrated display terminal Power up 54 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 47
193. ch is already assigned is displayed flashing If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT has no effect and the message continues to flash It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC 1755855 12 2009 133 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier Fri or Frib 34 SA2 SA3 dA2 L A dA3 MA2 A Fri or Frib SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x If SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 are not assigned they are set to 0 If MA2 MA3 are not assigned they are set to 1 A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters For multiplication the signal on MA2 or MAG is interpreted as a 100 corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding input If MA2 or MAG is sent via the communication bus or graphic display terminal an MFr multiplication variable page 51 must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited see page 125 134 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Ref 1B switching c
194. d 1 1 rPG high Overshoot value Static error Proportional gain rPG low Rise time time rlG high A Reference Anm dl M Integral gain rlG low time rPG and correct rdG increased time The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error Nx X T M x NN iP i x x j 176 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID feedback No nO No nO Not assigned function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed 11 Al1 AI2 Al2 Analog input NE Analog input si sl AI3 Al3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Al4 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted L1 RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted O Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus Ee Note If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 244 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted No nO Al net channel
195. d Thereby the internal voltage levels of the frequency inverter are adapted Parameter Input phase loss IPL has to be set to Ignore nO Parameter for operation with active front end Regen Connection AFE has to be set to Yes YES Thereby the undervoltage level of the frequency inverter is adapted to the operation with the active front end Parameter Dec ramp adapt brA is set to nO to inactivate this function Parameter Brake res fault Mgt bUb has to be set to ignore nO for HHP range only Parameter Deceleration dEC has to be increased for applications with high inertia to avoid overload of Active Front End This can be prevented also by rounding the deceleration ramp with parameter Begin Dec round tA3 Parameter 2 wire type tCt has to be set on Level LEL to ensure an automatic restart after undervoltage detection of the Active Front End An automatic restart is only possible on 2 wire control The integrated RFI filter has to be always deactivated position IT non grounded mains for all ATV 71 inverter and also for the Active Infeed Converter AIC because there exists no direct mains connection AFE ATV61 71 L1 5 S 12 e L3 oO PE HFI Filter HFI Filter RFI Filter must RF
196. d level of complexity 3 OPEN SAVE AS Can be used to save and recover drive configuration files 4 PASSWORD Provides password protection for the configuration b LANGUAGE Language selection 6 MONITORING CONFIG Customization of information displayed on the graphic display terminal during operation 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Customization of parameters Creation of a customized user menu Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms for menus and parameters 26 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Graphic display terminal 1 DRIVE MENU Term 0 00 2 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of 1 DRIVE MENU menus 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Simplified menu for a quick start Visualization of current motor and input output values Accesses the adjustmen
197. d being changed removed deliberately see the remarks below Control card replaced by a control Check that there are no card errors card configured on a drive with a In the event of the control card being changed deliberately different rating see the remarks below The current configuration is Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup inconsistent configuration if it is valid see page 250 Invalid configuration Check the configuration loaded previously The configuration loaded in the drive Load a compatible configuration via the bus or communication network is inconsistent Dynamic load Abnormal load variation Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle fault Removal of a run command causes a reset Cards pairing The CARDS PAIRING PPI In the event of a card error reinsert the original card function page 239 has been Confirm the configuration by entering the Pairing password configured and a drive card has been PPI if the card was changed deliberately changed Input phase loss Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse Check the power connection and the fuses blown Failure of one phase 3 phase ATV71 used on a single Use a 3 phase line supply phase line supply Unbalanced load Disable the fault by Input phase loss IPL No nO page This protection only operates with the 225 drive on load Undervoltage Line supply too low Check the voltage and the parameters of UNDERVOLTAGE Transient voltage d
198. d being lifted Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 Brake impulse bIP YES Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the load For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted set BIP 2 Ibr e g ascent always with a load and descent always without a load 2 Brake release current Ibr and Ird if BIP 2 Ibr Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor During testing adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly 3 Acceleration time For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0 5 seconds Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit The same recommendation applies for deceleration Reminder For a hoisting movement a braking resistor should be used 4 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 5 Brake release frequency blr in open loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 6 Brake engage frequency bEn Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 7 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application 1 Brake impulse bIP No 2 Brake release current Ibr
199. d channel is determined by the reference channel Parameters Fr1 Fr2 rFC FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example if the reference is Fr1 Al1 analog input at the terminals control is via LI logic input at the terminals LI Ref 1 channel RUN STOP T FWD REV Graphic display terminal LI Profile ds Forced local Ref 2 switching nO CMD Forward Reverse STOP Graphic display YES terminal Fro s Stop Key priority Ref 2 channel Key Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment 120 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Separate SEP configuration Separate reference and command Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example If the reference is in forced local mode via Al1 analog input at the terminals command in forced local mode is via LI logic input at the terminals The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1 Frib and Fr2 FLOC LI o nO ul AM 4 Al2 Cmd channel 1 hs LCCH RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display terminal LI Profile
200. dapted in accordance with the motor s capabilities to operate at maximum voltage UCP and maximum frequency FCP Motor voltage Max voltage UCP t Rated motor volt UnS Frequency Rated motor freq Freq Const Power FCP According to drive According to drive 4 V constant power rating rating and Standard mot freq bFr The parameter can be accessed if Vector Control 2pt UC2 Yes YES According to drive Standard mot freq 1 Freq Const Power rating and Rated bFr motor freq FrS The parameter can be accessed if Vector Control 2pt UC2 Yes YES 1755855 12 2009 73 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Synchronous motor parameters These parameters can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync mot SYn In this case the asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting nLr5 4 Nominal I sync 0 25 to 1 5 In 2 According to drive rating Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate nSPS Nom motor spdsync 0 to 60000 rpm Pr to drive Rated motor speed given on the nameplate On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm 1 to 50 According to drive rating 1 Pole pairs Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor g
201. ded by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Adjustment range ces 2 switching ch1 active Cd1 The parameter can be accessed if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO Ed ch1 active Cd1 channel 1 Cd1 active no switching ch2 active Cd2 channel 2 Cd2 active no switching Ln LH O See the assignment conditions on page 124 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel channel 1 Cd1 is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 channel Cmd channel 2 Cd2 is active LJ channel 1 Terminals tEr Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO 2 channel 2 Modbus Mdb Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or
202. e The sign and the sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque regardless of mode motor or generator Example of usage master slave with the TORQUE CONTROL tOr function page 183 Meas mot fr OFrr Measured motor speed Sig o p frq OFS Signed output frequency between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr Mot therm2 tHr2 Motor thermal state 2 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Mot therm3 tHr3 Motor thermal state 3 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Uns TrqRef Utr Torque reference between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Uns TrqRef Utr Signed torque reference between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque Torque lim tqL Torque limit between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Motor volt UOP Voltage applied to the motor between 0 and Rated motor volt UnS dO 1 dO1 Assignment to a logic output This assignment can only appear if DO1 assignment 401 page 108 has been assigned This is the only possible choice in this case and is only displayed for informational purposes 1 AO1 Type Current 0A Ej Voltage 100 Voltage output Current 0A Current output L1 AO1 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t 2 Current 0A LJ AO1 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Current 0A J AO1 min
203. e fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter causes the alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing If Brake assignment DLC page 161 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect 1 Fluxing assignment L No nO No nO Function inactive L11 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 Assignment is only possible if Motor fluxing FLU Not cont FnC bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1 If an Ll or a bit has not been assigned or if the assigned LI or bit is at 0 when a run command is sent fluxing occurs when the motor starts 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 154 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Limit switch management This function
204. e does not engage O Yes YES The brake engages Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating direction is reversed 0 to 10 0 Hz Auto AUtO T Jump at reversal 1 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 161 is Hoisting UEr O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters O Oto 10 Hz Manual control When the reference direction is reversed this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque and consequential release of load on transition to zero speed Parameter is not applicable if Engage at reversal bEd Yes YES Time to restart 1 0 00 to 15 00 s 0 00 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 163 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Brake control logic expert parameters Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting br HO b0 Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging O 0 0 The engage release sequenc
205. e information becomes false 1 0 to 9999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 1755855 12 2009 105 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J LO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 103 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO1 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and I
206. e is executed full O 1 1 brake is released immediately Use in open loop and closed loop mode Arun command may be requested during the brake engagement phase Whether or not the brake release sequence is executed depends on the value selected for b0 brH0 4 Frequency 4 60 brHO 0 elay or logic output Frequency bEn b0 brHO 1 Relay or logic output Note If a run command is requested during the ttr phase the complete brake control sequence is initialized brH BRH b1 Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault O 0 0 The brake contact in steady state fault is active fault if the contact is open during operation brF brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases O 1 1 The brake contact steady state fault is inactive The brF brake contact fault is only monitored during the brake release and engage phases 164 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting brHe b2 0 Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence O 0 0 The brake contact is not taken into account O 1 1 The brake contact is taken into account Use in open loop and closed loop mode If a logi
207. e of stop Stt page 141 is forced to Ramp stop rMP only if a ramp stop be configured J PID wake up thresh 0 0 to 100 0 0 If the PID and Low speed operating time tLS functions are configured at the same time the PID regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting operating at low speed then stopping and so on Parameter rSL restart error threshold can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP The function is inactive if tLS 0 or if rSL 0 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 180 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 2 preset PID ref No nO Function inactive LH O See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active 4 preset PID ref No nO M
208. e previous page Example Setting for K speed loop filter SFC 100 Speed prop gain SPG affects the passband and response time Speed time integral SIt affects excessive speed Initial response Reference division 1 0 8 0 6 04 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Initial response Reference division 0 8 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time ms Reduction in SIT w Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Increase in SPG Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reduction in SIT Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 T Time in ms Increase in SPG Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms 58 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Adjustment range Factory setting ENA prop gain 1 to 9999 250 See page 81 1 ENA integral gain 0 to 9999 See page 81 IR compensation See page 74 Slip compensation 0 to 300 See page 74 d Ramp divider See page 141 N DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1
209. e references rP1 internal reference 9500 rp2 preset reference 6500 rP3 preset reference 8000 rP4 preset reference 11200 The DISPLAY CONFIG menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its format Adjustment range 4 reference PIP2 15000 PIP1 6000 4 PID feedback PIF2 4500 20000 Other parameters rSL parameter Can be used to set the PID error threshold above which the PID regulator will be reactivated wake up after a stop due to the max time threshold being exceeded at low speed tLS Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive for example pressure control with a compressor If PIC YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive for example temperature control using a cooling fan The integral gain may be short circuited by a logic input Analarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output Analarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output 174 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Manual Automatic operation with PID This function combines the PID regulator the preset speeds and a manual reference Depending on the state of the logic input the speed reference is given by
210. e selections will depend on the type of encoder card used The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 1755855 12 2009 77 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Encoder check procedure This procedure applies to all types of encoder 1 Set Motor control type Ctt to a value other than FVC FUC even if it is the required configuration For example use SVC V UUC for an asynchronous motor and Sync mot SYn for a synchronous motor Configure the motor parameters in accordance with the specifications on the rating plate Asynchronous motor see page 69 Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Synchronous motor see Synchronous motor parameters on page 74 Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis 145 Cust stator R syn rSAS Current limitation CLI must not exceed the maximum motor current otherwise demagnetization may occur Set Encoder usage EnU No nO Perform auto tuning In the case of an incremental encoder set Encoder type EnS and Number of pulses PGI page 77 according to the encoder used Set Encoder check EnC Yes YES Check that t
211. e sent No nO Fast stop assign Ee Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 180 O No nO Not assigned L11 LH le See the assignment conditions on page 124 The is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 bit in I O profile IO at 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control tCC page 89 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent 1 Ramp divider 1 0 to 10 4 The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt and if Fast stop assign FSt is not No nO The ramp that is enabled dEC or dE2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 141 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J DC injection assign No nO Ee Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 130 No nO Not assigned
212. e speeds reached on both drives Yarn control trC input activated Synchronization signal present Note On the slave drive the Quick step High GSH and Quick step Low qSL parameters should generally be left at zero 1755855 12 2009 209 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Yarn control No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 The traverse control cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0 Traverse freq high 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz 0 to 10 Hz 0 to Traverse freq Quick step High high trH 5 0 to Traverse Freq Quick step Low Low trL Traverse ctrl accel Traverse ctrl decel polius Reel time 0 to 9999 minutes 0 minute Reel execution time Traverse Freq Low End reel tpe No nO Function not assigned LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted O dO1 dO1 Analog output 1 functioning as a logi
213. e wiring of the braking unit and the resistor Check the braking resistor The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt 000 parameter page 238 if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive at and above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for ATV71eeeNA Precharge Charging relay control fault or charging resistor damaged Thyr soft charge DC bus charging fault thyristors Turn the drive off and then back on again Check the internal connections Inspect repair the drive Differential curent Fault Current difference between power block A and B ATV71EC71NA4 M13N4 or ATV71EM12Y M20Y only Check thyristor with TEST THYRISTORS Check IGBT with TRANSISTOR TEST Check current transformer Encoder coupling Break in encoder s mechanical coupling Check the encoder s mechanical coupling Control Eeprom Internal memory fault control card Power Eeprom Internal memory fault power card Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Turn off reset return to factory settings Inspect repair the drive Encoder Encoder feedback fault Check Number of pulses PGI and Encoder type EnS page 77 Check that the encoder s mechanical and electrical operation its power supply and connections are all correct If necessary reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Dutput Ph rotat
214. ed CUS S ramps f Hz The rounding coefficient is fixed where t2 0 6 x t1 and t1 set ramp time The rounding coefficient is fixed where t2 0 5 x t1 and t1 set ramp time Customized ramps f Hz f Hz tA1 adjustable from 0 to 100 Frs HS tA2 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA1 tA3 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA4 adjustable from 0 to 10096 tA3 0 0 AR 4 As a of t1 where t1 set ramp time ti ti Ramp increment 1 0 1 0 1 O 0 01 Ramp up to 99 99 seconds O 0 1 Ramp up to 999 9 seconds L1 1 Ramp up to 6000 seconds This parameter is valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration dEC Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 0 01 to 6000 s 2 3 05 Acceleration 1 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 69 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven gJ Deceleration 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 3 05 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 69 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 137 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co
215. ed OK OK OK Thyristor 12 1 OK ENT RDY Term 50 00Hz TRANSISTOR TEST Check that a motor is connected Enter the motor nameplate data ENT to perform the test ESC to cancel Term 50 00Hz OA The result for each IGBT is displayed on 2 lines The first line shows whether or not it has short circuited The second line shows whether or not it is open GBT3 GBT 4 GBT 4 GBT 5 GBT 5 GBT6 short circuit GBT 6 OK GBT 1B 1 OK GBT 1B 1 Open GBT 2B 1 OK GBT 2B 1 OK 1 GBT 6B 1 short circuit GBT 6B 1 OK Note To start the tests press and hold down 2 s the ENT key 1 Test results for Thyristor 4 12 and IGBT 1B 6B are olny accessible for ATV71EC71N4 to M13N4 and ATV71EM12Y to M20Y 246 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 11 IDENTIFICATION Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 9 COMMUNICATION MAIN MENU ENT 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 11 IDENTIFICATION E LY 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 6 0410 product Vx x OPTION 1 EXTENSION CARD Vx x
216. ed if Motor control type Ctt 2 V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts 0 to 1600 Hz ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 1600 Hz ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 1600 Hz ontrol type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 1600 Hz ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 600 or 1000 V according to rating ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 0 to 1600 Hz ontrol type Ctt 2 V F 5pts UF5 0 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 N N This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range 1 Vector Control 2pt The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not Sync mot SYn No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active Used in applications in which the motor rated speed and frequency need to be exceeded in order to optimize operation at constant power or when the maximum voltage of the motor needs to be limited to a value below the line voltage The voltage frequency profile must then be a
217. ed to display the functions assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI8 display segment assignment high 1 low 0 wr pec dal State 0 205 2 LI2 LIS Ll4 LI5 Lie LI7 118 Example above LI1 and LI6 are at 1 LI2 to LI5 LI7 and LI8 are at 0 Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI9 to 1114 and PR Power Removal display segment assignment high 1 low 0 wb 2 74 l d LA E be StateO mE iced aie LI9 LI10 Li11 Li12 11 13 1114 PR Example above 119 and 14 are at 1 LI10 to 1113 are at 0 and PR Power Removal is at 1 Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the A and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible 52 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With integrated display terminal Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups Current alarm group numbers Internal PID reference PID reference via graphic display terminal c
218. ed to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive to 500 1 600 Hz 0 2 according to rating I 8rd Skip Frequency grd skip frequency This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive 1 Skip Freq Hysteresis 0 1 to 10 Hz 1 Hz Parameter visible if at least one skip frequency Skip Frequency JPF Skip Frequency 2 JF2 or 3rd Skip Frequency JF3 is different from 0 Skip frequency range between JPF JFH and JPF JFH for example This adjustment is common to all 3 frequencies JPF JF2 and JF3 1 Load correction 0 to 1000 Hz Rated correction in Hz See page 85 Torque ratio Coefficient applied to Torque reference 1 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 67 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC With graphic display terminal 0A
219. edictive speed input Preset ref PID 2 See page 181 1 See page 181 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 See page 181 1 See page 181 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 4 See page 181 1 See page 181 Preset PID reference Brake release FW 0 to 1 32 In 2 See page 161 Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement Brake release Rev 0 to 1 32 In 2 See page 161 Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement Brake Release time 0 to 5 00 s See page 162 Brake release time delay Auto AUtO Auto AUtO 0 to 10 Hz Brake release freq See page 162 Brake release frequency threshold Auto AUtO Auto AUtO Brake engage freq 0 to 10 Hz See page 162 Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage delay See 162 Time delay before request to engage brake To delay the engaging of the brake for horizontal movement only if you wish the brake to engage when the drive comes to a complete stop 1 graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the p
220. elease FW Ibr and Brake release Rev Ird settings page 161 Apply the recommended settings for Brake engage freq bEn Com network Communication fault on communication card Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Check the wiring Check the time out Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive CANopen com Interruption in communication on the CANopen bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the CANopen User s Manual External flt LU Bit Fault triggered by an external device depending on user Check the device which caused the fault and reset External fault com Fault triggered by a communication network Check for the cause of the fault and reset Out contact open The output contactor remains open although the closing conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit input contactor The drive is not turned on even though Mains V time out LCt has elapsed Check the contactor and its wiring Check the time out Check the line contactor drive connection Al2 4 20mA loss Al3 4 20mA loss Al4 4 20mA loss Loss of the 4 20 mA reference on analog input Al2 AI3 or Al4 Check the connection on the analog inputs Overbraking Braking too sudden or driving load Increase the deceleration time Install a braking resistor if necessary Activate the Dec ra
221. enance environment without having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive in particular for high power drives deactivate motor phase loss detection Output Phase Loss OPL No nO Check and optimize the following parameters IR compensation UFr page 74 Rated motor volt UnS and Rated mot current nCr page 69 and perform Auto tuning tUn page 70 Mains overvoltage Line voltage too high Disturbed mains supply Check the line voltage PTC1 overheat Overheating of the PTC1 probes detected PTC2 overheat Overheating of the PTC2 probes detected LI6 PTC overheat Overheating of PTC probes detected on input LI6 Check the motor load and motor size Check the motor ventilation Wait for the motor to cool before restarting Check the type and state of the PTC probes PTC1 probe PTC1 probes open or short circuited PTC2 probe PTC2 probes open or short circuited LI6 PTC probe PTC probes on input LI6 open or short circuited Check the PTC probes and the wiring between them and the motor drive IGBT short circuit Power component fault Perform a test via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Motor short circuit Short circuit at drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor s insulation Perform tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Modbus com
222. encoder Freq gen PtG Use of a frequency generator unsigned reference J Freq min value 300 to 300 kHz 0 The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed g Freq max value 0 00 to 300 kHz 300 kHz The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed Freq signal filter 0 to 1000 ms The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr Interference filtering 102 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI R1 Assignment No drive flt FLt No nO Not assigned No drive flt FLt Drive not faulty relay normally energized and de energized if there is a fault Drv running rUn Drive running Freq Th attain FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 67 HSP attain FLA High speed attained I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Cid page 66 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att SA Motor 1 thermal state attained PID error al PEE PID error alarm
223. epends is modified Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr parameters Xyw return to their factory settings J Stator R measured Cold stator resistance calculated by the drive in read only mode Value in millionms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of millionms maQ 100 above 75 kW 100 HP ldr Magnetizing current in A calculated by the drive in read only mode Lfr Leakage inductance in mH calculated by the drive in read only mode T2r Rotor time constant in mS calculated by the drive in read only mode Nominal motor slip Rated slip in Hz calculated by the drive in read only mode To modify the rated slip modify the Rated motor speed nSP page 69 Pr Number of pairs of poles calculated by the drive in read only mode Cust stator resist Cold state stator resistance per winding modifiable value In milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP in hundredths of milliohms 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Idw Magnetizing current in A modifiable value Lfw Leakage inductance in mH modifiable value T2w Rotor time constant in mS modifiable value 1755855 12 2009 75 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC
224. ermas 9 6 ee wu 922 S ET page 37 Simplified menu for fast startup page 45 Visualization of current motor and input output values page 54 Adjustment parameters can be modified during operation page 70 Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc page 88 I O configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc page 116 Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc page 129 Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc page 217 Configuration of fault management page 241 Communication parameters fieldbus page 248 Access to configuration files and return to factory settings page 251 Specific menu set up by the user using the graphic display terminal page 252 Menu for the Controller Inside card if present page 255 page 31 A dash appears after menu and submenu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes Examples FUn menu ACC parameter E The grayed out menus may not be accessible depending on the control access LAC configuration 1755855 12 2009 29 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Integrated display terminal Accessing menu parameters Save and store the displ
225. ernal com link RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A Network fault Application fault Internal link fault 1 Internal link fault 2 Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT ENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Term 50 00Hz 80A internal com link Drive state ETA status word ETI status word Cmd word Motor current Output frequency Elapsed time Line voltage ENT Motor thermal state Command Channel Channel ref active This screen indicates the number of communication faults for example with the option cards Number from 0 to 65535 ENT This screen indicates the state of the drive at the moment the selected fault occurred 1755855 12 2009 245 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS THYRISTORS TEST is only accessible for ATV71eeeM3 drives gt 18 5 kW ATV71eeeN4 drives gt 18 5 kW and all ratings of ATV71eeeY drives RDY Term 450 00Hz TEST PROCEDURES ENT THYRISTORS TEST RDY Term 50 00Hz RDY Term 50 00Hz THYRISTORS TEST TRANSISTOR TEST ENT to perform the test ESC to cancel Term 50 00Hz OA Fail
226. es Code Page g E E o a p 2 2 E 2 T W S E le 2 g 2 E B gt gt o 4 gt a z 8 5 as B 8 amp Jee fen Se fae ee ee e oe ee ee ee 29 29 2 se ce 25 z5 x5 ANOC 243 ADI 111 AD IF 112 AD I 111 Age is AOCF 113 114 114 ADJE 114 HUH 1 113 ADHI 114 ADLI 111 AOL 2 ks AOL 114 APH 51153 ASHI 112 ASH2 113 ASH 114 ASL I ASLE 113 ASLI 114 HEr 221 HUI 98 AUS 51 53 AUE 70 bbH 85 bL I 161 bo CO 243 bECd 162 bEd 163 bEn 65 162 bEE 66 162 bFr 42 69 b IP 161 278 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Index of parameter codes Code Page yn E T 2 2 2 E u o 315125 e e 2 T g 8 2 E z z B a le I2 Js Je ig 4 15 12 E Se oe E E E Es Mc 242054 E E E as m E mu Bl E B E mu Fist b Ir 65 162 bLC 161 brH 140 br HO 164 brHI 164 brHe 165 brH3 165 brHH 165 brad 238 brP 238 brr 165 bre 65 162 bru 238 bSP 92
227. ew parameters and functions New parameter REGEN CONNECTION A F E page 215 With this parameter itis possible to retun the braking energy to the mains and reduce the harmonics 8 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Steps for setting up PROGRAMMING Procedure applicable if the factory configuration page 10 and use of the SIMPLY START SIM menu only are sufficient for the application 2 Power up without run command If you are using a separate power supply for the control section follow the instructions on page 15 Select the language if the drive has a graphic display terminal E 4 Configure the SIMPLY START 5 menu O 2 wire or 3 wire control O Macro configuration Motor parameters 9 Perform an auto tuning operation O Motor thermal current Tips Before you start programming complete the user setting tables page 274 Perform an auto tuning operation to optimize performance page 43 If you get lost return to the factory settings page 250 cg Note Check that the wiring of the drive is compatible with its configuration Acceleration and deceleration ramps O Speed variation range 5 Start 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Factory configuration Drive factory settings The Altivar 7
228. external fault Logic can be configured via External fault config LEt if a logic input has been assigned External fault config cuve Mahl AG Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a logic input It defines the positive or negative logic of the input assigned to the fault O Active low LO Fault on falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned input Active high HIG Fault on rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input External fault mgt Freewheel YES Type of stop in the event of an external fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not
229. flexibility and stability hoisting or high inertia for example Speed prop gain SPG affects excessive speed Speed time integral SIt affects the passband and response time Initial response Reduction in SIT w Reduction in SIT Reference division Reference division Reference division A A 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 i 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms Initial response Increase in SPG s Increase in SPG 47 Reference division Reference division Reference division 4 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 5 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 a 9 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 E Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms 1755855 12 2009 57 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Special case Parameter K speed loop filter SFC not 0 This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time trajectory positioning or servo control When set to 100 as described above the regulator is a PI type without filtering of the speed reference Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on th
230. g operation or when stopped Configuration Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place Can be displayed during operation A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 1755855 12 2009 15 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Setup Preliminary recommendations Starting Important In factory settings mode the motor can only be supplied with power once the forward reverse and DC injection stop commands have been reset On power up or a manual fault reset or after a stop command If they have not been reset the drive will display nSt but will not start f the automatic restart function has been configured Automatic restart Atr parameter in the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu see page 221 these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary Test on a low power motor or without a motor In factory settings mode Output Phase Loss detection OPL page 224 is active OPL YES To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive particularly useful in the case of high power drives deactivate Output Phase Loss
231. g time The parameter can be accessed if Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES 2 Trg l limit stop ignore nO Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 Trg l limit time out popes If fault has been configured Time delay for taking SSF Limitation fault into account Parameter that can be modif
232. ge 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 188 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Line contactor command The line contactor closes every time a run command forward or reverse is sent and opens after every stop as soon as the drive is locked For example if the stop mode is stop on ramp the contactor will open when the motor reaches zero speed Ee Note The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 V source Example circuit Note The Run Reset button must be pressed once the Emergency ii stop 7 Emergency stop button has been released 3 Run Reset E N K11 K10 C KM1 ATV 71 Lle P24 Lin LO Re Noe a o 77 Lle Run command Forward or Reverse Forward Ki K10 LO Re Line contactor ass LLC or Lin Drive lock LES reverse EE ro CAUTION This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit Failure to follow this inst
233. guration 2 or motor 2 202 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Switching command Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration 2 or 3 the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs The table below lists the possible combinations LI LI Number of configuration 2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motor 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 1 Schematic diagram for multimotor mode Configuration 1 Configuration 0 if the 2 contacts are open Configuration 2 Auto tuning in multimotor mode This auto tuning can be performed Manually using a logic input when the motor changes Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 15t time after switching on the drive if the Automatic autotune parameter on page 70 Yes YES Motor thermal states in multimotor mode The drive protects the three motors individually Each thermal state takes into account all stop times including drive shutdowns It is therefore not necessary to perform auto tuning every time the power is switched on It is sufficient to auto tune each motor at least once Configuration information output In the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS menu a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor 2 or 3 for remote informat
234. h macro configuration can still be modified in the other menus 1755855 12 2009 37 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Assignment of the inputs outputs Input Start Stop M handling Gen Use Hoisting PID regul Network C Mast output slave Alt Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 1 channel Ref 2 channel Ref 1 channel PID reference Ref 1 channel integrated Modbus 1 Al2 No Summing ref 2 Summing ref 2 PID feedback Torque reference AO1 No No No No No No No R1 No drive flt drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt R2 No No No Brk control No No No LI1 2 wire Forward Forwarg Forwarg Forwarg Forwarg Forwarg Forwarg LI2 2 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI3 2 wire No 2 preset speeds Jog Fault reset PID integral Ref 2 Trq spd reset switching switching 114 2 wire 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset PID Fault reset Fault reset ref LI5 2 wire No 8 preset speeds Torque limitation 4 preset No
235. h1 active Fr1 See the diagrams on pages 118 and 119 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1 channel Fr1 active ch1B active Frib no switching Ref 1B channel 1 active LH O See the assignment conditions on page 124 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active see page 125 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 Ref 1B channel Fr1b is active Ref 1B switching rCb is forced to ch1 active Fr1 if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the terminals analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 125 Q Ref 1B channel el ne No nO Not assigned 11 11 Analog input 12 Al2 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Note In the following instances only assignments via the terminals are possible Profile CHCF Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the termina
236. he rotation of the motor is safe Set the motor rotating at stabilized speed 15 of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds and use the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu to monitor its behavior If it trips on an Encoder fault EnF Encoder check EnC returns to No nO Check the parameter settings see points 1 to 4 above Check that the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder its power supply and connections are all OK Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Output Ph rotation PHr parameter page 70 or the encoder signals 10 Repeat the operations from step 5 onwards until Encoder check EnC changes to Done dOnE 11 If necessary change Motor control type Ctt to FVC FUC 78 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Encoder check Not done nO Encoder feedback check See procedure on previous page The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 O Not done nO Check not performed O Yes YES Activates monitoring of the encoder O Done dOnE Check performed successfully The check procedure checks The direction of rotation of the encoder motor The presence of signals wiring continuity The number of pulses revolution If a fault is detected the drive locks in Encoder fault EnF fault m
237. hed If a speed other than zero is then required the command to release the brake is sent following torque application No nO Brake does not engage at regulated zero speed O 0 0 to 30 0 s Brake engage delay once zero speed is reached 1 0 to 5 00 s 0 J Brake engage delay Time delay before request to engage brake To delay brake engagement if you wish the brake to be engaged when the drive comes to a complete stop 1 Brake engage time 1 010 5 00 s Brake engage time brake response time Auto DC inj level 1 n pono E Level of standstill DC injection current Ee Note The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not FVC FUC and if Movement type bSt page 161 is Traveling HOr CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 162 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Engage at reversal O No nO The brak
238. his value is compatible with the inertia being driven Begin Acc round TOUS 10 See page 138 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time End Acc round 10 See page 138 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round tA1 0 to 100 _1 Begin Dec round See page 138 Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time 1 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 55 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range End Dec round 10 See page 138 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 1 Low speed Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set be
239. hold Ftd page 67 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq Th 2 attain F2d page 67 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att SA Motor 1 thermal state attained Th mot att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att tS3 Motor 3 thermal state attained Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning HSP attain FLA High speed attained Al C drv tHA Drive overheating Load mvt al 65 Braking speed alarm Brk cont al bCA Brake contact alarm PID error al PEE PID error alarm PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm Al2 Al 4 20 AP2 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 AI3 Al 4 20 AP3 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input AI3 Al4 Al 4 20 AP4 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Al4 Lim att SSA Torque limit alarm Th drv att tAd Drive thermal state attained IGBT alarm tJA IGBT alarm Torque Control al Torque control alarm Brake al 00 Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al APA Alarm generated by an option card Regen underV al UrA Reserved Rope slack alarm rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config rSd parameter page 172 High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd ttH page 66 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd
240. ic Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 275 Index of functions 2 wire 2C 41 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 188 3 wire 3C 41 speed 149 speed around a reference 151 AUTO DC INJECTION 143 AUTOMATIC RESTART 221 Auto tuning 43 AUTO TUNING BY LI 204 Brake logic control 157 CATCH ON THE FLY 222 Command and reference channels 117 Deferred stop on thermal alarm 226 Direct power supply via DC bus 214 DRIVE OVERHEAT 225 ENA SYSTEM 80 ENCODER CONFIGURATION 101 EVACUATION 212 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS 248 FAULT RESET 220 FLUXING BY LI 154 Half floor 213 High speed hoisting 168 JOG 145 Limit switch management 155 Line contactor command 189 Load measurement 166 Load sharing 85 Load variation detection 236 Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS COMFIG 201 Motor thermal protection 223 Noise reduction 83 Output contactor command 191 Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING 198 PASSWORD COd 255 PID regulator 173 Positioning by sensors or limit switches 193 Preset speeds 146 PTC probes 218 RAMP 1137 REFERENCE SWITCH 135 REGEN CONNECTION 215 Rope slack 171 RP CONFIGURATION 99 Save reference 153 STOP CONFIGURATION 141 Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 195 Summing input S
241. ied during operation or when stopped 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 1755855 12 2009 233 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor This function uses the Pulse input input from the VW3A3202 extension card and can therefore only be used if this card has been inserted and if the Pulse input input is not being used for another function Example of use An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor Time in seconds gt When applied to the Pulse input input this signal supports Measurement and display of the motor speed signal frequency 1 T This frequency is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 51 or 53 Overspeed detection if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold the drive will trip on a fault Brake failure detection if brake logic control has been configured If the speed does not drop sufficiently quickly following a command to engage the brake the drive will trip on a fault This function can be used to detect worn brake linings Detection of a speed threshold that can be adju
242. imited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq FrS It must not exceed 500 Hz if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not V F or for ATV71eeeY drives or for drives rated higher than ATV71HD37 Values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Max frequency tFr 2 Auto tuning No nO O No nO Auto tuning not performed O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE O Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Caution e Itis essential that all the motor parameters are correctly configured before starting auto tuning Asynchronous motor Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr Synchronous motor Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS If one or more of these parameters is modified after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return to No nO and the procedure must be repeated Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic
243. in torque mode to ensure distribution of the load 40 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Adjustment range 1 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C get O 2 wire 2C JC O 3 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring 71 424 LI Lix LI1 forward NE reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring ATV 71 24 Li LI2 Lix LI1 stop TEE LI2 forward E reverse A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control tCC press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The following function will be returned to factory settings 2 wire type tCt page 89 as will all functions which assign logic inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 12 Macro configuration Start Stop StS Start Stop StS Start stop M handling Handling O Hois
244. input phase loss DCB DC injection braking in progress DEC Deceleration FLU Motor fluxing in progress FST Fast stop NLP No line power no line supply on L1 L2 L3 NST Freewheel stop OBR Auto adapted deceleration PRA Power Removal function active drive locked RDY Drive ready RUN Drive running SOC Controlled output cut in progress TUN Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm 20 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Graphic display terminal Example configuration windows RDY Term 0 00Hz When only one selection is possible the selection made is indicated by 4 5 LANGUAGE Example Only one language can be chosen Chinese Turkish Russian PARAMETER SELECTION When multiple selection is possible the selections made are indicated by 1 8 SETTINGS Example A number of parameters can be chosen to form the USER MENUJ Ramp increment FA Acceleration wA Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Edit Example configuration window for one value RDY Term 0 00Hz RDY Term 0 00Hz Acceleration Acceleration 51s 94 s Min 0 01 Max 99 99 Min 0 01 Max 99 99 The lt lt and gt gt arrows keys F2 and F3 are used to select the digit to be modified and the navigation button is rotated to increase or decrease this number 1755855
245. ion PHr parameter page 70 or the encoder signals Out contact stuck The output contactor remains closed although the opening conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit 268 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies IGBT desaturation Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Probable cause Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu internal com link Communication fault between option card and drive Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Check the connections Check that no more than 2 option cards max permitted have been installed on the drive Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive Rating error The power card is different from the card stored Check the reference of the power card Incompatible PB The power card is incompatible with the control card Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility Internal serial link Communication fault between the internal cards Check the internal connections Inspect repair the drive Internal mftg zone Internal data inconsistent Recalibrate the drive performed
246. ion or when stopped 172 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn PID regulator Block diagram The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback measurement The black rectangle Restart error Error threshold Auto inversion wake up Manual Internal gum p PAU reference PII p YEs Om Med ri SL i ii T A ES vege 1810 man Je Reference A Pages 119 Gains Pages and 120 119 120 P PID references AH Predictive Ramps Scaling speed RP PIF1 PIF2 x PSr Encoder PIP1 PIP2 3 Network Al 4 PID Preset manual references feedback Manual nO SP2 Parameter SP16 represents the factory a setting assignment 1 Ramp 2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups PID feedback PID feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs Al1 to Al4 to the frequency input or the encoder according to whether extension cards have been inserted PID reference The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters
247. ion transmission Note As the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu is switched these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which information is required 1755855 12 2009 203 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Multimotors No nO No nO Multiconfiguration possible O Yes YES Multimotor possible 2 Configurations No nO No switching LI 1 Li1 to LI6 Li6 LI7 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 L111 to LHA LI14 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C1 in to 0115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C21 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations 1 Configurations nO No switching LI 1 Li1 to LI6 Li6 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 Li11 to LHA 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C1 in to 0115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C21 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C415 C415 With a Controller
248. ions Although this documentation relates to version V3 3 it can still be used with earlier versions as the updates merely involve the addition of values and parameters and none of the parameters of the previous versions have been modified or removed Enhancements made to version V1 2 in comparison to V1 1 Factory setting Note 1 In version V1 1 the analog input was 0 10 V For safety reasons in the new version this input has been set to 0 10 V Note 2 In version V1 1 analog output AO1 was assigned to the motor frequency In the new version this output is not assigned at all With the exception of these two parameters the factory settings of version V1 1 remain the same in the new version The new functions are factory set to disabled Motor frequency range The maximum output frequency has been extended from 1000 to 1600 Hz depending on the drive rating and control profile New parameters and functions Menu 1 2 MONITORING SUP Addition of internal states and values relating to the new functions described below Menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt High torque thd ttH page 66 Low torque thd ttL page 66 Pulse warning thd page 67 Freewheel stop Thd FFt page67 Menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC rpm increment InSP page 69 Extension of the following configurations to all drive ratings previously limited to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and to 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 synchronou
249. ious line To increase or decrease the reference if control via the terminal is activated Note Buttons 3 4 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly if control via the terminal is activated Disconnected terminal When the terminal is disconnected 2 LEDs become visible Green LED DC bus ON p Red LED lt q Fault HMI Modbus 18 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal Description of the graphic screen Term 0 00 Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 Display line Its content can be configured the factory settings show The drive state see page 20 The active control channel Term Terminals HMI Graphic display terminal MDB Integrated Modbus CAN Integrated CANopen NET Communication card APP Controller Inside card Frequency reference Current in the motor 2 Menu line Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu 3 Menus submenus parameters values bar charts etc are displayed in drop down window format on a maximum of 5 lines The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video 4 Section displaying the functions assigned to the F1 to F4 keys and aligned with them for example Code F1 Displays the code of the
250. ip MGT USb page 228 Invalid config Option card changed or removed When an option card is removed or replaced by another the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed or removed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes the factory settings to be restored see page 250 for the parameter groups affected by the card These are as follows Card replaced by a card of the same type cards Drive menu drM Encoder cards Drive menu drM Communication cards only the parameters that are specific to communication cards Controller Inside cards Prog card menu PLC Card removed or replaced by a different type of card I O card Drive menu drM Encoder card Drive menu drM Communication card Drive menu drM and parameters specific to communication cards Controller Inside card Drive menu drM and Prog card menu PLC Control card changed When a control card is replaced by a control card configured on a drive with a different rating the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes all the factory settings to be restored 1755855 12 2009 273 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com User settings ta
251. is input to 0 before connecting the emergency power supply to the line supply Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Evacuation assign O No nO Function not assigned O LI Li1 to LI6 Li6 L1 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted O LH 1 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at 1 if the drive is stationary Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at 0 as soon as the drive stops According to voltage According to voltage rating rating Evacuation Input V Minimum permissible AC voltage value of the emergency power supply The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO ATV71eeeN4 range from 220 to 320 V factory setting 220 V ATV71eeeS6X and ATV71eeeY range from 380 to 415 V factory setting 400 V Evacuation freq Value of the evacuation mode frequency reference The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO The adjustment range is determined by the Low speed LSP page 56 Rated motor freq FrS and Rated motor volt UnS page 69 parameters and by Evacuation Input V rSU above If LSP lt Frs x rSU UnS rSP min LSP rSP max Frs x rSU UnS If LSP 2 Frs
252. itions Remove any dust from the drive Assistance with maintenance fault display If a problem arises during setup or operation first check that the recommendations relating to the environment mounting and connections have been observed The first fault detected is saved and displayed and the drive locks The drive switching to fault mode can be indicated remotely via a logic output or a relay which can be configured in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu see for example R1 CONFIGURATION 1 page 103 Menu 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It displays faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry out tests see page 245 Clearing the fault Disconnect the drive power supply in the event of a non resettable fault Wait for the display to disappear completely Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it The drive is unlocked after a fault By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely then switching on again e Automatically in the scenarios described for the AUTOMATIC RESTART Atr function page 221 By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the FAULT RESET rSt function page 220 By pressing the STOP RESET button on the graphic display terminal Menu 1 2 MONITORING SUP This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive state and its current values It can be accessed
253. l4 Interm point X 0 to 100 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 100 Max value Min value 096 corresponds to 2 if the range is 100 gt 100 100 corresponds to Max value Al4 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 1755855 12 2009 97 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Al net channel Virtual input This parameter can also be accessed in the PID REGULATOR Pld submenu page 177 No nO Not assigned in this case the virtual input does not appear in the analog input assignment parameters for the functions O Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus O CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted Scale the value 8192 transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 244 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or
254. lay 6 Name of submenu on graphic display terminal 3 Parameter code on 4 digit 7 segment display 7 Name of parameter on graphic display terminal 4 Parameter value on 4 digit 7 segment display 8 Value of parameter on graphic display terminal Ee Note The text in square brackets indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal The factory settings correspond to Macro configuration CFG Start Stop StS This is the macro configuration set at the factory 34 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Interdependence of parameter values The configuration of certain parameters modifies the adjustment range of other parameters in order to reduce the risk of errors This may result in the modification of a factory setting or a value you have already selected Example 1 Current Limitation CLI page 61 set to 1 6 In or left at its factory setting 1 5 In 2 Switching freq SFr page 61 set to 1 kHz and confirmed with ENT restricts Current Limitation CLI to 1 36 In 3 If Switching freq SFr is increased to 4 kHz Current limitation CLI is no longer restricted but remains at 1 36 In If you require 1 6 In you must reset Current Limitation CLI 1755855 12 2009 35 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Finding a parameter in this document The following assis
255. le action buttons Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction s The input assigned to the speed command increases the speed the input assigned to the soeed command decreases the speed 2 Use of double action buttons Only one logic input assigned to speed is required speed with double press buttons Description 1 button pressed twice 2 steps for each direction of rotation A contact closes each time the button is pressed Released speed 15 press 2nd press speed maintained faster Forward button a aandb Reverse button candd Example of wiring ATV 7i control LI1 forward terminals Reverse Lly speed Motor frequency LSP 0 LSP i11 d o Forward 274 press 114 press 0 Reverse 274 press 114 press 0 Do not use this speed type with 3 wire control Whichever type of operation is selected the max speed is set by High speed HSP see page 44 Note If the reference is switched via rFC see page 126 from any one reference channel to another reference channel with speed the value of reference rFr after ramp may be copied at the same time in accordance with the Copy channel 1 gt 2 COP parameter see page 127 If the reference is switched via rFC see page 126 from one reference channel to any other reference channel with speed the value of reference rF
256. led When the traverse control command is disabled the drive returns to its base reference following the ramp determined by the traverse control function The function then stops as soon as it has returned to this reference Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active 1755855 12 2009 205 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Function parameters These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference as shown in the diagram below Motor speed tdn tUP Frequency jump 4 trH Base reference trL Frequency jump 0 1 trC Yarn control Assignment of the traverse control command to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit tdn Traverse ctrl decel time in seconds tUP Traverse ctrl accel time in seconds e Traverse freq high in Hertz e trL Traverse Freq Low in Hertz qSH Quick step High in Hertz e qSL Quick step Low in Hertz Reel parameters tbO Reel time Time taken to make a reel in minutes This parameter is intended to signal the end of winding When the traverse control operating time since command trC reaches the value of tbO the logic output or one of the relays changes to state 1 if the corresponding function EbO has been assigned The traverse control operating time EbOt can be monitored online by a communication b
257. leration Speed prop gain ENT RDY Term 0 00 2 0A Ramp increment RDY Term 0 00Hz If no custom settings have ENT User name been made the standard value appears names units etc User name FLOW REFERENCE 3 Display on 1 or 2 lines of Offsets and coefficients are Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 numerical values Do not Use the navigation selector button to increment the character too high a multiplier 99999 alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the max display next or previous character respectively ENT RDY Term 0 00Hz OA Term 0 00Hz gt Customized Standard use of the factory set Standard unit Customized LBS Customized customization of the unit Nb characters max MA etc select from drop down list Once you have entered the unit if you press ENT the Ramp increment screen will re appear in order to display the name Press ESC to return to Unit The message entered appears Term 0 00Hz while the View button is pressed RDY Term 0 00 2 0A SERVICE MESSAGE ENT For any service dial Nb characters max 23 gt Names USER MENU NAME DRIVE NAME configuration serial no lines of messages names of Term 0 00Hz units etc are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite ER MENU NAME If no custom settings have bee
258. lizing the drive via a logic input without turning it off using Product reset assig page 220 The possibility of configuring the output phase loss fault Output Phase Loss OPL page 224 to Output cut OAC has been extended to all drive ratings previously limited t045 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100HP for ATV71eeeNA4 The external fault EXTERNAL FAULT EtF page 227 can now be configured in positive or negative logic via External fault config LEt New monitoring function based on speed measurement via Pulse input page 234 via the FREQUENCY METER menu FgF New function for detecting load variation page 236 via the DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT menu dLd Short circuit faults on the braking unit can now be configured via Brake res fault Mgt bUb page 238 Menu 7 DISPLAY CONFIG In 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS page 261 the KEYPAD CONTRAST and KEYPAD STAND BY parameters to adjust the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display unit Enhancements made to version V1 6 in comparison to V1 2 Extension of the range with the addition of ATV71eeeeY drives for 500 to 690 V supplies There are no new parameters but the adjustment ranges and factory settings of some parameters have been adapted to the new voltages Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Increased adjustment range for the relay and logic output delay parameters 0 to 60000 ms instead of 0 to 9999 ms Enhancements made to versio
259. ls analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 125 PID configured with PID references via the terminals Et E Ee Fo Et ER sd o Fs E 1755855 12 2009 135 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting d Summing ref 2 Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b No nO No source assigned 11 11 Analog input AI2 A12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCO Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted TE E Est ES s fer od 1 page 98 Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus can be configured using Al net channel A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury
260. lse input missing if the Check the wiring of the input cable and the detector used input is used for speed measurement Auto tuning Special motor or motor whose power is Check that the motor drive are compatible not suitable for the drive Motor not connected to the drive Check that the motor is present during auto tuning If an output contactor is being used close it during auto tuning 270 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared These faults can also be reset by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 220 APF CnF COF EPF1 EPF2 FCF2 LFF2 LFF3 LFF4 ObF OHF OLF OPF1 OPF2 OSF OtF1 OtF2 OtFL PHF PtF1 PtF2 PtFL SLF1 SLF2 SLF3 SrF SSF and tJF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 231 Application fault Probable cause 7 Controller Inside card fault Please refer to the card documentation Brake control Brake release current not reached Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage freq bEn only regulated when brake logic control is assigned Check the drive motor connection Check the motor windings Check the Brake r
261. lue of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm 1 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Max fbk alarm 1 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 PID error Alarm 1 0 to 65535 2 Regulator error monitoring threshold PID integral reset No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive the PID integral is enabled If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active the PID integral is disabled 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that be modified during operation or when stopped 178 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Speed ref assign PID regulator predictive speed input No nO Not assigned function inactive 11 11 Analog input AI2
262. m of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration Compare the length given in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power and select the shorter length Example Two 7 5 kW 10 HP motors take the lengths on the 15 kW 20 HP table row which are shorter than those on the 7 5 kW 10 HP row and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor with unshielded GORSE cable and SOP 6 the result is 40 2 20 m maximum for each 7 5 kW 10 HP motor In special cases for example different types of cable different motor powers in parallel different cable lengths in parallel etc we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals To retain the overall drive performance do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily 1755855 12 2009 83 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length for 400 V line supply Altivar 71 Motor Cable cross section Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Unshielded GORSE cable Shielded GORSE cable Type H07 RN F 4Gxx Type GVCSTV LS LH kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 ATV71H075N4 0 75 1 1 5
263. me time f The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other Stop functions have priority over run commands Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references Ee Note This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic display terminal see page 128 1755855 12 2009 131 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Incompatible functions The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below Automatic restart This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 89 Catch a spinning load This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 89 This function is locked if automatic injection on stop Auto DC injection Continuous Ct See page 143 The SUP monitoring menu page 45 can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility When a function is assigned a appears on the graphic display terminal as illustrated in the example below 0A REFERENCE SWITCH REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION If you attempt to a
264. measurement of a speed greater than a fixed min threshold O 0 0 No action in the event of a movement for which no command has been given 1 1 If a movement occurs for which no command has been given the drive switches to zero speed regulation with no brake release command and a bSA alarm is triggered to 5 00 s Os J Current ramp time Torque current ramp time increase and decrease for a current variation equal to Brake release FW Ibr o Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 165 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Load measurement This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current Brake release FW Ibr of the BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL bLC function The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input usually a 4 20 mA signal to the pulse in input or to the encoder input according to the type of weight sensor Examples Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load Measurement of the total weight of an elevator winch the cabin and counterweight The current Brake release FW Ibr is adapted in accordance with the curve below Ibr 3 2 A Point 2y 2 Point 1x LP1 T 1 1 l
265. menu see page 73 A CAUTION UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To protect a motor which has a nominal voltage lower than drive supply voltage it is mandatory to use Vector Control 2pt UC2 function in order to limit maximal voltage of the motor lower than network voltage Nevertheless it is necessary to check that instantaneous voltage applied to the motor link to DC bus voltage are compatible with characteristics of this one Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 1755855 12 2009 17 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal Although the graphic display terminal is optional for low power drives it is a standard component on high power drives see catalog The graphic display terminal can be disconnected and connected remotely on the door of an enclosure for example using the cables and accessories available as options see catalog Description of terminal 1 Graphic display 2 Function keys F1 F2 F3 F4 see page 19 7 ESC key Aborts a value a parameter or a menu to return to the previous selection 3 STOP RESET button 6 Button for reversing the direction of rotation of the motor 4 RUN button 5 Navigation button Press ENT To save the current value To enter the selected menu or parameter Turn CW To increment or decrement a value CCW To go to the next or prev
266. meters described on page 169 is used to measure the load The effective measurement cycle will not be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold rStL which corresponds to the weight of the hook A logic output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the rope slack state in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 1755855 12 2009 171 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting High speed hoisting No nO Function inactive O Speed ref SSO Speed reference mode O I Limit CSO Current limitation mode 0 to 100 Motor speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Ascending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO Speed ref SSO 0 to 100 Gen speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO 0 1sto65s Load measuring tm Duration of speed step for measurement The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO 0 to Rated motor Measurement spd freq FrS Speed stabilized for measurement The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO High speed
267. mp adapt brA function page 140 if it is compatible with the application Drive overheat Power board PCB over temperature Braking unit over temperature Phase module over temperature Rectifier over temperature Check the motor load the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting Motor overload Triggered by excessive motor current Check the setting of the motor thermal protection check the motor load Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting 1 output phase loss Loss of one phase at drive output Check the connections from the drive to the motor 1755855 12 2009 271 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared continued Name 3 motor phase loss Probable cause Motor not connected or motor power too low Output contactor open Instantaneous instability in the motor current Remedy Check the connections from the drive to the motor If an output contactor is being used parameterize Output Phase Loss OPL Output cut OAC page 224 Test on a low power motor or without a motor In factory settings mode motor phase loss detection is active Output Phase Loss OPL Yes YES To check the drive in a test or maint
268. n I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In I O profile can be switched without logic inputs o o o Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 No nO 1 Reference saved Associated with the speed function this parameter can be used to save the reference When the run commands disappear saved to RAM When the line supply or the run commands disappear saved to EEPROM Therefore the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is the last reference saved O No nO No save the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is Low speed LSP see page 44 O RAM rAM Saved in RAM EEprom EEP Saved in EEPROM 150 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn speed around a reference The reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing subtraction multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant see the diagram on page 118 For improved clarity we will call this reference A The action
269. n V2 5 in comparison to V1 6 Menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt New parameters Skip Frequency JPF Skip Frequency 2 JF2 and 3rd Skip Frequency JF3 page 67 allow to avoid critical speed which generate resonances New parameter Skip Freq Hysteresis JFH page 67 to adjust the range of skip frequency e Possibility to adjust the parameter Torque ratio trt page 67 visible too in TORQUE CONTROL tOr menu page 183 Important For V2 5 version the behaviour of the following functions is different from the previous version when type of stop freewheel is selected factory value LIMIT SWITCHES LSt function POSITIONING BY SENSORS LPO function shutdown command by communication see CiA402 state chart in communication parameters manual Actually on previous versions type of stop freewheel was not well done 1755855 12 2009 7 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Software enhancements Enhancements made to version V2 7 in comparison to V2 5 Menu 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Addition in 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS page 261 of Power up menu This parameter allows to choose the menu which displays on the drive on power up Menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt The adjustment range of Time to restart ttr page 163 can now be configured between 0 00 and 15 00 seconds Enhancements made to version V3 3 in comparison to V2 7 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu N
270. n assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 103 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function page 199 LJ Freq threshold 2 0 0 to 1600 Hz High speed HSP Frequency threshold for Freq Th 2 attain F2A function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 103 or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function page 199 1 Freewheel stop Thd 0 0 to 1600 Hz 0 0 Hz See page 141 This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt or Ramp stop rMP O 0 0 Does not switch to freewheel stop 0 1 to 1600 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop 0 to 118 100 1 Motor therm level See page 224 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay to 500 or 1 600 Hz 0 Hz according to rating 1 Skip Frequency Skip frequency This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be used to prevent a critical speed which would cause resonance being reached Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive to 500 or 1 600 Hz 0 2 according to rating 1 Skip Frequency 2 274 skip frequency This parameter prevents prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency This function can be us
271. n deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 and vice versa 500 to 500 or 1600 0 Hz Min PID output to 1600 according to rating See page 178 Minimum value of regulator output in Hz 0 to 500 or 1600 Max PID output according to rating See page 178 Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm See page 178 1 See page 178 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Max fbk alarm See page 178 1 See page 178 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PEr _1 PID error Alarm 0 to 65535 1 100 See page 178 Regulator error monitoring threshold Speed input 1 to 100 See page 179 Multiplying coefficient for pr
272. n made the standard value appears names units etc Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 Use the navigation selector button to increment the character alphabetical order and and F2 and F3 to switch to the next or previous character respectively FLOW REFERENCE Nb characters max 18 262 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 7 2 USER MENU PARAMETER SELECTION SELECTED LIST Code lt lt gt gt 0 00Hz 0A PARAMETER SELECTION 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Quick ENT PARAMETER SELECTION 1 8 SETTINGS Ramp increment Acceleration ENT Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 List lt RDY Term 0 00 2 0A Ramp increment Acceleration Speed prop gain Delete Up Use the F2 and F3 keys to arrange the parameters in the list example below using F3 RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A SELECTED LIST Acceleration Ramp increment Delete Up Down Selection of parameters included in the user menu Note The 1 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or RDY Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List Parameter list making up the user menu 1755855 12 2009 263 This document pr
273. nO if Profile CHCF page 125 I O profile IO 2 Forced local Ref No nO No nO Not assigned control via the terminals with zero reference 11 A1 Analog input AI2 A12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal Reference HMI Frequency ref LFr page 51 command RUN STOP FWD REV buttons RP Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted If the reference is assigned to an analog input RP PI or Encoder PG the command is automatically assigned to the terminals as well logic inputs 1 Time out forc local 0 1 to 30 s The parameter can be accessed if Forced local assign FLO is not No nO Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode 244 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS UN Term 450 00Hz 80 FAULT HISTORY internal com link RUN Term 450 00Hz 80A CURRENT FAULT LIST int
274. nO m Note Forced local is not Al2 active in I O profile Ref 1B channel Zia PID B Summing ref 2 D See page 173 Al4 9 Lec Summing ref 3 9 SAA m Graphic display Subtract ref 2 E terminal Y dAe x Subtract ref 3 lt cc LL LI o 1 1 nO Ref 2 channel Fr 2 re Channel 2 i Low speed FLO Key Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter i The black square represents the factory setting assignment Instructions Fri Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 terminals SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 Terminals only Fr2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card and speed 1 Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu 1755855 12 2009 119 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Not separ SIM configuration Reference and command not separate The comman
275. nce Speed gt Speed control Torque curent 6 Torque Z limitation reference Torque 7 Torque ref sign Torque ratio Torque ramp time tSd trt trP LI LI The function can be used to switch between operation in speed regulation mode and operation in torque control mode In torque control mode the speed may vary within a configurable deadband When it reaches a lower or upper limit the drive automatically reverts to speed regulation mode fallback and remains at this limit speed The regulated torque is therefore no longer maintained and two scenarios may occur Ifthe torque returns to the required value the drive will return to torque control mode Ifthe torque does not return to the required value at the end of a configurable period of time the drive will switch to fault or alarm mode A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the changes in the behavior of the motor do not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Torque Torque limitation Torque C reference D Speed reference AB and CD Fallback to speed regulation BC Torque control zone Ideal operating point The torque sign and value can be transmitted via a logic output and an analog output 182 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc
276. nction inactive 11 11 Analog input 12 Al2 Analog input AIS3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Al4 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted O Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 3 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 137 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 179 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Low speed time out i Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 44 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor restarts if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period Note If Low speed time out tLS is not 0 Typ
277. nd gt gt F2 and F3 can be used to select each of the numbers and the navigation button to increment or decrement the numbers 1 3 in the example below Term 0 00 2 0A DIRECT ACCESS TO RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 8 SETTINGS ENT Ramp increment 01 Acceleration 9 515 Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 1 3 SETTINGS 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Opens a window in which the last 10 parameters modified can be accessed directly RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Rated mot current Acceleration 10s L p ENA prop gain 1 2 Rated mot current 15A Preset speed 4 20 Hz 30 Hz 15 0A Preset speed 5 1755855 12 2009 25 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal MAIN MENU Menu mapping RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 1 SIMPLY START 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of MAIN MENU menus 1 DRIVE MENU See next page 2 ACCESS LEVEL Defines which menus can be accesse
278. ng For ATV71eeeY 500 Vac 500 500 Volts AC 600 Vac 600 600 Volts AC 690 Vac 690 690 Volts AC factory setting El Oo El o Ej Ej 1 Undervoltage level Undervoltage fault trip level setting in V The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value Undervolt time out DID USE 058 Time delay for taking undervoltage fault into account 1 UnderV prevention Behavior in the event of the undervoltage fault prevention level being reached No nO No action O DC Maintain MMS This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible O Ramp stop rMP Stop following an adjustable ramp Max stop time StM O Lock out LnF Lock freewheel stop without fault Parameter that be modified during operation or when stopped 228 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LJ UnderV restart tm 1 0 s to 999 9 s Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for UnderV prevention Ramp stop rMP if the voltage has returned to normal Prevention level Undervoltage fault prevention level setting in V which can be accessed if
279. nous speed x 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors 1 Max frequency 10 to 1600 Hz If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq FrS Hz It must not exceed 500 Hz for ATV71eeeY drives or those rated higher than ATV71HD37 values between 500 Hz and 1600 Hz are only possible for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 42 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description EUn LJ Auto tuning n O No nO Auto tuning not performed CERE O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE dOnE O Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Caution tis essential that all motor parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr are configured correctly before starting auto tuning If at least one of these parameters is modified
280. nput cont LLC assignments LO1 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 LO2 assignment Identical to LO1 LO2 delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control OLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO2 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments 1 LO2 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integra
281. o Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Auto DC inj level 1 Dres A QUT Level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 143 is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 Auto DC inj time 1 0 5 Standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection page 143 is No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC FUC or Sync mot SYn this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 0 to 1 2 In 1 0 5 In 1 274 level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 143 is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 Auto DC inj time 2 010305 274 standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 143 Yes YES Note When
282. o Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 500 or 1600 Hz 4 Ramp 2 threshold according to rating Ramp switching threshold The 274 ramp is switched if the value of is not 0 0 deactivates the function and the output frequency is greater than Frt Threshold ramp switching can be combined with Ramp switch ass rPS switching as follows LI or bit Frequency Ramp 0 lt Frt ACC dEC 0 gt Frt AC2 dE2 1 lt Frt AC2 dE2 1 gt Frt AC2 dE2 2 Ramp switch ass O No nO Not assigned O LI1 Li1 See the assignment conditions on page 124 ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 0 AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 1 Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold Frt gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned Deceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to decelerate from Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold Frt gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned 1 The paramete
283. o CrL3 if the range is 100 100 100 corresponds to AI3 max value CrH3 AI3 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 96 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Al4 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al4 in order to check for example for compatibility problems 14 Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 10U Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input Al4 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V Al4 min value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Voltage 10U 0 to 20 0 mA Al4 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V Al4 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Voltage 10U AI4 filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering Al4 range 0 100 POS O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input 0 V corresponds to reference 100 corresponds to reference 0 10 V corresponds to reference 100 A
284. o set a threshold for switching to freewheel at the end of a stop on ramp or fast stop Brake engage at regulated zero speed Brake engage at 0 DECd 162 Weight Weight sensor ass PES page 167 can now be assigned to virtual input Network AI AIU1 New rope slack function page 171 with the parameters Rope slack config rSd and Rope slack trq level rStL Use of the ramp Acceleration 2 AC2 page 179 when starting and waking up the PID function The torque limitation TORQUE LIMITATION tOL page 186 can now be configured in whole or in 0 196 increments using Torque increment IntP and assigned to virtual input Network AI AlU1 New stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch function page 195 with the parameters Stop distance Std Rated linear speed nLS and Stop corrector SFd Positioning by sensors or limit switch POSITIONING BY SENSORS LPO page 196 can now be configured in positive logic or negative logic using Stop limit config SAL and Slowdown limit cfg dAL Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP page 199 can now be assigned to the frequency thresholds attained Freq Th att FtA and Freq Th 2 attain F2A New half floor menu HALF FLOOR HFF page 213 Menu 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Possibility of reinitializing the drive without turning it off via Product reset rP page 220 e Possibility of reinitia
285. ocument provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Preset speeds 2 4 8 or 16 speeds can be preset requiring 1 2 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively ege Note You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds You must configure 2 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds You must configure 2 4 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds Combination table for preset speed inputs 16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference LI PS16 LI PS8 LI PS4 LI PS2 0 0 0 0 Reference 1 0 0 0 1 SP2 0 0 1 0 SP3 0 0 1 1 SP4 0 1 0 0 SP5 0 1 0 1 SP6 0 1 1 0 SP7 0 1 1 1 SP8 1 0 0 0 SP9 1 0 0 1 SP10 1 0 1 0 SP11 1 0 1 1 SP12 1 1 0 0 SP13 1 1 0 1 SP14 1 1 1 0 SP15 1 1 1 1 SP16 1 See the diagram on page 118 Reference 1 SP1 146 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn LI 2 preset speeds No nO No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 LI 4 preset speeds No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds 1 8 preset speeds O No nO Function inactive LH
286. ode 1 Encoder usage The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 No nO Function inactive Fdbk monit SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only Spd fdk reg rEG The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed loop operation Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt SVC V UUC the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed This configuration is not accessible for other Motor control type Ctt values Speed ref PGr The encoder provides a reference Can only be selected with an incremental encoder card 1 The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted and the available selections will depend on the type of encoder card used The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 1755855 12 2009 79 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC ENA SYSTEM ENA SYSTEM is a control profile designed for rotating machines with unbalanced load It is used primarily for oil pumps The operating principle applied Allows operation without a braking resistor Reduces mechanical stress on the rod Reduces line current fluctuations
287. ol 205 Stop configuration 141 B Evacuation 212 Half floor 213 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Application functions Safety functions fault management Power Removal safety function see User s Manual El m Deferred stop on thermal alarm 226 Alarm handling 115 Bl El B El Fault management 218 to 240 El ig IGBT tests 229 B Ej B B Catch a spinning load 222 E Braking resistor thermal protection 238 E B Motor protection with PTC probes 218 E H m il Undervoltage management 228 E m 4 20mA loss 230 El B Uncontrolled output cut output phase loss 224 Automatic restart 221 a Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of 234 rotation of the motor Load variation detection 236 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Setup Preliminary recommendations Turning on and configuring the drive A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Before turning on and configuring the Altivar 71 check that the PWR POWER REMOVAL input is deactivated at state 0 in order to prevent unintended operation Before turning on the drive or when exiting the configuration menus check that the inputs assigned to the run command are deactiva
288. on Adjustment range Factory setting Automatic restart No nO Function inactive L1 Yes YES Automatic restart after locking on a fault if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods 1 s 5 s 10 s then 1 minute for the following attempts The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained Use 2 wire control 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL see page 89 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again The faults which permit this function are listed on page 271 Max restart time Rr O 5 min 5 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 10 minutes 30 minutes 30 30 minutes 1 hour 1h 1 hour 2 hours 2h 2 hours 3 hours 3h 3 hours Unlimited Ct Unlimited This parameter appears if Automatic restart Atr Yes YES It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restart
289. on to an input or output the user must make sure that this input or output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible or undesirable function The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions which may prevent other functions being assigned It may be necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable another Check the compatibility table below 130 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Compatibility table 9 v QI 2 m rope d g a bs 8 a UE o 5 lea H g 8 S 2 19 12 98 1919 1105 5 214 p E 7 S 2 m 5 5 a i 2 c o d 2 D D cO o o c 8 2 5 32 5 E 2 JS o o c S c Z 8 amp Z le Z lo 18 25 S 9 5 2 15 S JE 15 2 2 2 5 21 218 Oo e o E 9 a 9 3 gt e 5 o g o 2 c S v 5 m 8 5 a S S o 9 E Q 5 o o e c 5 o c Q c o w o 9 o c 9 e g 9 o lo Je gt 9 5 o c gt o o o o 9 8 o S s jo 9
290. ovided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS PROTECTION ENT VISIBILITY Code gt gt Quick RDY 0 00Hz RDY Tem 100042 0A Selection to display all VISIBILITY ENT PARAMETERS parameters or only the PARAMETERS active parameters MENUS Press ESC to exit this screen Code Quick ENT ENT MENUS You remain exclusively in the 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU menu All 1 1 SIMPLY START menus are selected by default s Press ENT to deselect a menu 13 Gs LA Press ENT to reselect a menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Z 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTSCFG 7 RDY 0 00Hz 0 RDY Term 40 00Hz IMPORTANT The protected channel or channels must be PROTECTION PROTECTED CHANNELS selected as a protected parameter on a selected channel PROTEC TED CHANNELS remains accessible on the channels that are not selected PROTECTED PARAMS PROG CARD PROTECTED PARAMS PROTECTED PARAMS In these screens all parameters in the 1 ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 13 SETTINGS DRIVE MENU menu can be protected 1 1 SIMPLY START ENT 7 and are displayed for selection except 9 Ramp increment Y for the Expert parameters p gt 1 2 MONITORING Acceleration 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration Press the All button to select all the par
291. p Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Thermal alarm stop No nO Function inactive in this case the following parameters cannot be accessed O Yes YES Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm CAUTION The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Drv therm state al Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop Motor therm level Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop 1 Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 226 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting External fault ass No nO Function inactive LH O See the assignment conditions on page 124 If the assigned bit is at 0 there is no external fault If the assigned bit is at 1 there is an
292. p Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Index of parameter codes Code Page yn E T 2 2 2 E 2 T W S E lt a a a e 2 5 gt 2 5 E 1512 5 5 SO oe ES 2420 lesa ll eres mue e e P IF 177 P IF 177 PIFe 177 PII 177 P IL 99 P IN 179 PIP2 177 BRS 178 POH 64 178 POL 64 178 PP I 239 PPn 75 5 74 Pre 181 Pry 181 PrP 64 178 PS l 199 P52 200 53 200 EB 147 5 147 P58 147 P5 147 P5r 65 179 PSE 125 PEL I 219 219 PECL 219 PEH 51 58 q5H 66 210 451 66 210 rl 103 rid 104 r IH 104 r 15 104 286 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG dems 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL E Ds 2 1 1 SIMPLY START diz amp 5 1 2 MONITORING SUP 1 3 SETTINGS SEE 1 6 COMMAND CEL 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION EON 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS GESE 4 PASSWORD C Od re T red ER reH ER A
293. p Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Load slip detection O No nO Fault not monitored Only the alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay O Yes YES Fault monitored Load slip detection Sdd is forced to Yes YES if Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC FUC The fault is triggered by comparison with the ramp output and the speed feedback and is only effective for speeds greater than 1096 of the Rated motor freq FrS see page 69 In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and if the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to 0 Encoder coupling INo no No nO Fault not monitored O Yes YES Fault monitored If the brake logic control function has been configured the factory setting changes to Yes YES Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES is only possible if Load slip detection Sdd Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC FUC and Brake assignment DLC page 161 is not No nO The fault monitored is the break in the mechanical coupling of the encoder In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and if the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to 0 LJ Encoder check time 210 10s 2s Encoder faults filterin
294. peed ref SSO Torque variation detection During high speed operation the load is compared to that measured during the speed step The permissible load variation and its duration can be configured If exceeded the drive switches to fault mode Current limitation mode High speed hoisting HSO page 172 Current Limit CSO On ascend during high speed operation an increase in load will result in a drop in speed Even if high speed operation has been activated if the motor frequency drops below the I Limit Frequency SCL threshold page 172 the drive will switch to fault mode The detection is realised only for a positive variations of the load and only in the high speed area area upper to I Limit frequency SCL On descend operation takes the form of speed reference mode 236 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Dynamic load time Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation fault Dynamic load fault dLF into account O No nO No load variation detection O 0 00 s to 10 00 s Adjustment of the time delay for taking fault into account Dynamic load time 1 to 100 100 96 Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection as a of the load measured during the speed step
295. play terminal the stop will be performed according to the Type of stop Stt page 141 irrespective of the configuration of Stop Key priority PSt 1 Profile Not separ SIM 8 serie SE8 ATV58 interchangeability see Migration Manual The 8 serie SE8 configuration is used to load via PowerSuite for example an ATV58 drive configuration in an ATV71 that has already been set to this configuration This assignment cannot be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted Note Modifications to the configuration of the ATV71 must only be made using PowerSuite when it is in this configuration otherwise operation cannot be guaranteed O Not separ SIM Reference and command not separate O Separate SEP Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in I O profile IO I O profile 10 profile When 8 serie SE8 is selected and I O profile IO is deselected the drive automatically returns to the factory setting this is mandatory This factory setting only affects the 1 DRIVE MENU menu It does not affect either 1 9 COMMUNICATION or 1 5 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With the graphic display terminal a screen appears to perform this operation Follow the instructions on the screen With the integrated display terminal press ENT and hold it down for 2 s This will save the selection and return to the factory setting 1755855 12 2009 125 This document provi
296. r after ramp is always copied at the same time This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place 1755855 12 2009 149 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI speed assignment No nO Function inactive LI1 Li1 i LI6 Li6 Li7 to LI10 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted LI 11 L111 to ILIA 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 to C1151 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in VO profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In VO profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile can be switched without logic inputs Eo fe E FH EE Fe s oe Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Speed assignment Eos No nO Function inactive LI1 Li1 to LI6 Li6 Li7 to 0110 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to LHA 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to 0115 C115 With integrated Modbus i
297. r can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 137 o Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 139 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ Dec ramp adapt Yes YES Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load which can cause an overvoltage fault No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active for applications that do not require strong deceleration The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and Motor control type Ctt page 71 They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with Yes YES Use comparative testing to determine your selection When Dec ramp adapt brA is configured on High torq x dYnx the dynamic performances for braking are improved by the addition of a current flow component The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy stored in the motor High torq A dYnA Addition of a constant current flow component High torq B dYnb Addition of a current flow component oscillating at 100 Hz O High torq C dYnC Addition of a current flow componen
298. r sets No nO Function inactive Freq Th att FtA Switching via Freq threshold Ftd page 67 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 67 O LI See the assignment conditions on page 124 Switching 2 parameter sets A2 3 parameter sets No nO Function inactive Freq Th att FtA Switching via Freq threshold Ftd page 67 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 67 LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 Switching 3 parameter sets Note In order to obtain 3 parameter sets 2 parameter sets must also be configured 2 PARAMETER SELECTION The parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if 2 parameter sets is not No Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT a tick then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT Example PARAMETER SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment SET 1 The parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were selected With the graphic display terminal
299. rMP only if a ramp stop can be configured 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz 1 Jog frequency See page 145 Reference in jog operation LI Jog delay See page 145 Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 62 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 5pg LJ Preset speed 2 0 to 1600 Hz 10 Hz See page 148 Preset speed 2 Preset speed 3 PSU See page 148 Preset speed 3 Preset speed 4 0 to 1600 Hz See page 148 Preset speed 4 Preset speed 5 DIS SUA See page 148 Preset speed 5 Preset speed 6 DIO eee re See page 148 Preset speed 6 Preset speed 7 See 148 7 8 See 148 8 9 Bio eee He See page 148 Preset speed 9 Preset speed 10 po Meee He See page 148 Preset speed
300. rameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not V F 2pts UF2 V F 5pts UF5 and Sync mot SYn Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact If slip setting lt actual slip The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state but at a speed lower than the reference If slip setting gt actual slip The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 8 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 74 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode These include Parameters calculated by the drive during auto tuning in read only mode For example Rir calculated cold stator resistance The possibility of replacing some of these calculated parameters by other values if necessary For example R1w measured cold stator resistance When a parameter Xyw is modified by the user the drive uses it in place of the calculated parameter Xyr Asynchronous motor If an auto tuning operation is performed or if one of the motor parameters on which auto tuning d
301. ration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R3 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false R4 Assignment Identical to R2 see page 104 R4 Delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control 0 Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R4 Active at ees Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R4 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when th
302. ref LI6 2 wire No Fault reset No No No No No 3 wire Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop 112 3 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI3 3 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI4 3 wire No 2 preset speeds Jog Fault reset PID integral Ref 2 Trq spd reset switching switching LI5 3 wire No 4 preset speeds Fault reset External fault 2 preset PID Fault reset Fault reset ref LI6 3 wire No 8 preset speeds Torque limitation No 4 preset PID No ref Option cards LI7 to 14 No No No No No No No LO1 to LO4 No No No No No No No R3 R4 No No No No No No No AI3 Al4 No No No No No No No RP No No No No No No No AO2 I motor I motor I motor I motor I motor I motor motor AOS No Sign torque No Sign torque PID Output No Motor freq Graphic display terminal keys F1 key No No No No No Control No via graphic display terminal F2 4 No No No No No No No keys In 3 wire control the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts 1 To start with integrated Modbus Modbus Address Add must first be configured page 243 Note These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes 38 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co In
303. rent threshold for High tq att ttHA function assigne a of the rated motor torque Low torque thd 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz 0 to 10 Hz 0 to Traverse freq high trH 0 to Traverse freq low trL 0 to 1 5 In 1 In 1 300 to 300 elay or a logic output see page 103 100 300 to 300 d to a relay or a logic output see page 103 as 50 Low current threshold for Low tq att function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 103 as a of the rated motor torque 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 91 23 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range FAL _ Pulse warning thd OHzto30 00kHz OHz Speed threshold measured by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 235 assigned to a relay ora logic output see page 103 Freq threshold 0 0 to 1600 Hz High speed HSP Frequency threshold for Freq Th att functio
304. rk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO4 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LJ LO4 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 0 to 9999 ms then 10 00 to 60 00 s on the integrated display terminal 1755855 12 2009 107 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output by assigning DO1 In this case when set to 0 this output corresponds to the AO1 min value 0 V or 0 mA for example and when set to 1 to the AO1 max value 10 V or 20 mA for example The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unch
305. rmation becomes true The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at 0 AJ R1 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true O 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true Configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt assignment 2 R1 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at 0 1 R2 Assignment Identical to R1 see page 103 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control bLC Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control 1 R2 Delay time 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LI R2 Active at 1
306. rog card cmd 0000 Hex Com Scan val Com Scan Out val Com Scan Out3 val Com Scan Out4 val Com Scan 5 val Com Scan Out6 val 0 Com Scan Out7 val 0 Com Scan 8 val 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 REQ REF WORD MAP COM SCANNER INPUT MAP and COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input and 8 output for integrated Modbus and for fieldbus cards Prog Card ref Ref Modbus Ref CANopen Com card ref 48 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication continued RUN Term 50 00Hz COMMUNICATION MAP Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex CANopen 12 5 Hz 2153 Hex Active ref channel Frequency ref ETA state word W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 F230 Hex W0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP PROG CARD SCANNER The state of the LEDs the periodic data the address the speed and the format etc is given for each bus 60 LED off 6 LED on Communication via Modbus 50 00Hz R RUN Term 80A COM LED Mb NET frames nb Mb NET CRC errors Communication via the graphic display terminal RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COM LE
307. rom 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned gJ Deceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 137 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 152 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Save reference Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0 1 s This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one logic input for each drive e Itis also used to confirm a line reference communication bus or network on several drives via a logic input This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is made F Motor frequency isons Reference 0 d
308. rque sign is the opposite of the reference 0 to 1000 Ll Torque ratio Coefficient applied to Torque reference tr1 2 Torque ramp time 0 to 99 99 s Rise and fall time for a variation of 10096 of the rated torque Speed SPd 1 Torque control stop O Speed SPd Speed regulation stop in accordance with the type of stop configuration see page 141 O Freewheel YES Freewheel stop O Spin SPn Zero torque stop but maintaining the flux in the motor This type of operation is only possible if Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC Spin time 0 to 3600 s The parameter can be accessed if Torque control stop tSt Spin SPn Spin time following stop in order to remain ready to restart quickly Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 183 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 2 x Max Positive deadband frequency tFr Positive deadband Value added algebraically to the speed reference Example for dbP 10 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 1 Negative deadband 0 to 2 x Max frequency tFr Negative deadband Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference Example for dbn
309. rs are NOT COMPATIBLE Do you want to continue In this case the download is possible but the parameters will be restricted 1755855 12 2009 253 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 3 OPEN SAVE AS DOWNLOAD GROUP None No parameters AIl All parameters in all menus Drive menu The entire 1 DRIVE MENU without 1 9 COMMUNICATION and 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Motor parameters Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS 00 UO to U5 05 F1 F1 to F5 F5 V constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal I sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP The motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode page 75 in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Mot therm current ItH in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Communication All the parameters in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu Prog control inside card All the parameters in the 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD menu 254
310. rs are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage ecd 11 Current Limitation 1 0 to 1 65 In 2 Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr is less than 2 kHz Ee Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 82 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range nrd 4 Noise reduction According to rating n O No nO Fixed frequency Factory setting at and above ATV71HD55M3X ATV71HD90N4 and ATV71HC11Y YES O Yes YES Frequency with random modulation F
311. rtain other functions See table on page 130 1 Output Phase Loss Yes YES L1 No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Tripping on OPF fault with freewheel stop O Output cut OAC No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re established and catch on the fly performed even if this function has not been configured Note Output phase loss OPL is forced to No nO if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync mot SYn For other Motor control type Ctt configurations Output phase loss OPL is forced to Yes YES if brake logic control is configured see page 161 OutPh time detect Time delay for taking the Output Phase Loss OPL fault into account 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 224 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt According to drive rating 1 Input phase loss Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus O Freewheel YES Fault
312. ruction can result in equipment damage 1755855 12 2009 189 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Line contactor ass Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LO1 Lo1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 201 Analog output 1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO 2 Drive lock No nO No nO Function inactive LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 124 The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 1 Mains V time out 5 to 999 5 5s Monitoring time for closing of line contactor If once this time has elapsed there is no voltage on the drive power circuit the drive will lock with a Line contactor fault LCF 190 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Output contactor command This allows the drive to control a contactor located
313. s is the factory set level Access to 6 menus only and access to all submenus in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU ANUSA 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 6 MONITORING CONFIG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT Advanced 1 9 COMMUNICATION Access to all menus and submenus 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS Several functions can be assigned to 1 11 IDENTIFICATION each input 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Tom 70 DOH OA 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD MAIN MENU eal DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Expert Access to all menus and submenus as for Advanced level and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 1755855 12 2009 31 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive bAS Limited access to SIM SUP SEt FCS USr COd and LAC menus Only one function can be assigned to e
314. s motor Sync mot SYn page 71 sinus filter Sinus filter page 82 noise reduction Noise reduction nrd page 83 braking balance Braking balance bbA page 85 Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Input can now be configured to 0 10 V or 0 10 V via Al1 Type Alit page 94 Al net channel AIC1 page 98 New methods of assigning relays and logic outputs page 103 rope slack high torque threshold low torque threshold motor in forward rotation motor in reverse rotation measured speed threshold reached load variation detection Analog output AO1 can now be used as a logic output and assigned to relay functions and logic outputs page 108 New method of modifying the scale of analog outputs page 110 using the parameters Scaling AOx min ASLx and Scaling AOx max ASHx New methods of assigning logic outputs page 111 signed motor torque and measured motor speed New methods of assigning alarm groups page 115 rope slack high torque threshold low torque threshold measured speed threshold reached load variation detection 6 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Software enhancements Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun The summing subtraction and multiplication reference functions can now be assigned to virtual input Network Al AIU1 page 136 New parameter Freewheel stop Thd FFt page 141 used t
315. s on a recurrent fault E o 1755855 12 2009 221 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI Catch on the fly Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events Loss of line supply or disconnection Reset of current fault or automatic restart Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart then follows the ramp to the reference speed This function requires 2 wire level control No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active When the function is operational it activates at each run command resulting in a slight delay of the current 0 5 s max Catch on the fly FLr is forced to No nO if brake logic control Brake assignment bLC is assigned page 161 or if Motor control type Ctt page 71 or if in open loop control Auto DC injection AdC page 143 Continuous Ct AJ Sensitivity 0 4 to 1596 0 6 Parameter accessible at and above ATV71HD55MSX ATV71HD90N4 and ATV71HC11Y Adjusts the catch on the fly sensitivity around the zero speed Decrease the value if the drive is not able to perform the catch on the fly and increase it if the drive locks on a fault as it performs the catch on the fly
316. s on page 124 The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1 If at this time the drive is stopped or being slowed down by limit switches it will restart up to its speed reference J Stop type Ramp stop rMP The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned O Ramp stop rMP On ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop ramp time reduced by Ramp divider see page 141 O Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Deceleration type The parameter be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned O Standard Std Uses the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp depending on which has been enabled O Optimized The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches in order to limit the operating time at low speed optimization of the cycle time the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial speed Stop distance No nO The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Activation and adjustment of the Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch function L1 No nO Function inactive the next two parameters will therefore be inaccessible L1 0 01 yd to 10 94 yd Stop distance range in yards g Rated linear speed 0 20 to 5 00 m s 1 00 m s
317. s on the voltage rating of the drive and the Mains voltage UrES parameter page 228 bbA QJ Braking balance No nO n O No nO Function inactive WIES O Yes YES Function active to be used on drives connected in parallel via their DC bus Used to balance the braking power between the drives The Braking level Ubr parameter must be set to the same value on the various drives The value Yes YES is possible only if Dec ramp adapt brA No nO see page 140 m Load sharing No nO When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed and each is controlled by a drive this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors To do this it varies the speed based on the torque O No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active The parameter can only be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 71 is not V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 LEE Load correction 1 0 to 1000 Hz Rated correction in Hz The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Torque Nominal torque 4 Frequency Nominal torque 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 85 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4
318. s to 20 s 100 ms The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA 2 Yes YES Time constant filter for correction in ms Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid instabilities Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1755855 12 2009 87 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O With graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 3 SETTINGS MAIN MENU 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 2 3 wire control Code lt lt gt gt Quick 1 DRIVE MENU With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive m 88 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The parameters in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and run command is present ECC 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C 21 5 O 2 wire 2 3L 8 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring 24 LM Lk LI1 forward reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pul
319. se is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring OS 24 LH LIB Lix 111 stop H na LI2 forward E7E E LIx reverse A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control tCC press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s It causes the following functions to return to factory setting 2 wire type tCt and Reverse assign rrS below and all functions which assign logic inputs and analog inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings It is advisable to configure this parameter before configuring the 1 6 COMMAND CtL and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury PCE J 2 wire type Transition trn LEL O Level LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run 1 or stop 0 Ern O Transition trn A change of state transition or edge is necessary to initiate operation in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply O Fwd priority PFO State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop but the forward input always takes priority over the reverse input Reverse assign Utere No nO Not assigned LI 1 Li1 to LI6 116
320. se to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent It can be accessed with the drive running Auto DC inj level 1 X ee mom Level of standstill DC injection current Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 71 mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 1 1 0 1 to 30 s 0 58 Standstill injection time The parameter be accessed if Auto DC injection is not No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC or Sync mot SYn this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 n pes 2nd level of standstill DC injection current The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 71 Sync mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during oper
321. selected parameter i e the code corresponding to the 7 segment display e HELP F1 Contextual help lt lt F2 Navigate horizontally to the left or go to previous menu submenu or for a value go to the next digit up displayed in reverse video see the example on page 21 oom Navigate horizontally to the right or go to next menu submenu going to the 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu in this example or for a value go to the next digit down displayed in reverse video see the example on page 21 Quick F4 Quick navigation see page 25 The function keys are dynamic and contextual Other functions application functions can be assigned to these keys via the 1 6 COMMAND menu If a preset speed is assigned to a function key and if the function key is pressed the motor will run at this preset speed until another preset speed or JOG is pressed speed reference is changed or Stop key is pressed 5 Indicates that there are no more levels below this display window Indicates that there are more levels below this display window 6 Indicates that this display window does not scroll further up Indicates that there are more levels above this display window 1755855 12 2009 19 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Graphic display terminal Drive state codes ACC Acceleration CLI Current limit CTL Controlled stop on
322. set PID reference Preset ref PID 3 rP3 page 181 without sending a run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fr1 HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function speed Faster only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 HMI LCC Press the key to run the drive and increase the speed Press STOP to stop the drive speed Slower only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 HMI LCC and if a different key has been assigned to speed Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed Press STOP to stop the drive T K Command via the display terminal takes priority over Cmd switching CCS and over Ref 2 switching rFC L F2 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment 1 F3 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment 1 F4 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment HMI Eed When the T K function is assigned to a key and that function is active this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when control returns to the graphic display terminal O Stop Stops the drive although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied to be taken into account on the next RUN Bumpless Does not stop the drive the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied 128 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc
323. splay terminal command reference is only active if the command and or reference channels from the terminal are active with the exception of T K command via the display terminal which takes priority over these channels Press T K command via the display terminal again to revert control to the selected channel Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive The JOG preset speed and speed functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM or Separate SEP The T K command via the display terminal can be accessed regardless of the Profile CHCF Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 F1 key assignment O No Not assigned O Jog JOG operation O Preset spd2 Press the key to run the drive at the 2 preset speed Preset speed 2 SP2 page 148 Press STOP to stop the drive O Preset spd3 Press the key to run the drive at the 3 preset speed Preset speed 3 SP3 page 148 Press STOP to stop the drive PID ref 2 Sets PID reference equal to the 2 preset PID reference Preset ref PID 2 rP2 page 181 without sending a run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fr1 HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function El PID ref 3 Sets a PID reference equal to the 3 pre
324. ssign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned an alarm message will appear With the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A INCOMPATIBILITY The function can t be assigned because an incompatible function is already selected See programming book ENT or ESC to continue With the integrated display terminal COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed When you assign a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit to a function pressing the HELP button will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input bit or channel 132 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn When a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned to another function the following screens appear With the graphic display terminal RUN 50 00Hz 1250 50 00Hz WARNING ASSIGNED TO Ref 2 switching ENT gt Continue ESC gt Cancel If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT results in the following display RUN 50 00Hz 1250 50 00Hz Un assign the present functions or select Advanced access level With the integrated display terminal The code for the first function whi
325. sted using Pulse warning thd page 67 and is assignable to a relay or logic output see page 103 234 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Frequency meter Activation of the speed measurement function No nO Function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed O Yes YES Function active assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the Pulse input input Pulse scal divisor 1001000 Scaling factor for the Pulse input input divisor The frequency measured is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 51 or 53 Overspd pulse thd No nO Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring Overspeed SOF fault No nO No overspeed monitoring O 1 Hz to 30 00 Hz Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the Pulse input input divided by Pulse scal divisor FqC 0 0sto 10 0s 0 0s L1 Pulse overspd delay Time delay for taking overspeed fault into account M Level fr pulse ctrl No nO Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the input Pulse input speed feedback Speed fdback loss SPF fault O No nO No monitoring of speed feedback O 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Adju
326. stment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback fault difference between the estimated frequency and the measured speed 1 Pulse thd wo Run Ier ino Activation and adjustment of brake failure monitoring Brake feedback brF If brake logic control Brake assignment bLC page 161 is not configured this parameter is forced to No nO L1 No nO No brake monitoring O 1 Hz to 1000 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping abrake failure fault detection of speeds other than zero Pulse thd wo Run 0 0s to 10 0s Time delay for taking brake failure fault into account 1755855 12 2009 235 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Load variation detection This detection is only possible with the high speed hoisting function It can be used to detect if an obstacle has been reached triggering a sudden upward increase or downward decrease in the load Load variation detection triggers a Dynamic load fault fault ALF The Dyn load dLb parameter can be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this fault Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a logic output There are two possible detection modes depending on the configuration of high speed hoisting Speed reference mode High speed hoisting HSO page 172 S
327. t page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 1 AI3 4 20mA loss lgnore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if AI3 min value CrL3 page 96 is not greater than 3 mA Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire
328. t oscillating at 200 Hz but with a greater amplitude Dec ramp adapt brA is forced to No nO if the brake logic control Brake assignment bLC is assigned page 161 or if Braking balance bbA page 85 Yes YES The factory setting changes to High torq A dYnA with certain ratings if Sinus filter OF page 82 Yes YES The function is incompatible with applications requiring Positioning on a ramp The use of a braking resistor the resistor would not operate correctly CAUTION Do not use High A dYnA High torq B dYnB or High torq C dYnC configurations if the motor is a permanent magnet synchronous motor as it will be demagnetized Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 140 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting of stop Ramp stop rMP Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command O Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp O Fast stop FSt Fast stop O Freewheel stop nSt Freewheel stop O DC injection dCI DC injection stop Note If the brake logic function on page 161 has been enabled or if Low speed time out tLS page 62 or 180 is not 0 only ramp type stops may be configured Freewheel stop Thd 1 0 0 to 16
329. t parameters which can be modified during operation Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc Configuration of fault management Communication parameters fieldbus Motor drive diagnostics Identifies the drive and the internal options Access to configuration files and return to factory settings Specific menu set up by the user in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Configuration of optional Controller Inside card 1755855 12 2009 27 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Integrated display terminal Low power Altivar 71 drives see catalog feature an integrated display terminal with a 7 segment 4 digit display The graphic display terminal described on the previous pages can also be connected to these drives as an option Functions of the display and the keys 2 Modbus status LEDs Four 7 segment displays 2 CANopen status LEDs Exits a menu or parameter or aborts the displayed value to return to the previous value in the memory Returnstothe previous OO menu or parameter or increases the displayed value Goes to the next menu or par
330. tain other functions See table on page 130 1 Modbus fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated Modbus Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 141 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 89 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 130 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 232 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thor
331. tance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided With the integrated display terminal Direct use of the parameter code index page 277 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter With the graphic display terminal Select the required parameter and press F1 Code The parameter code is displayed instead of its name while the key is held down Example ACC RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0 01 i A 1 3 SETTINGS 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment Code Ramp increment 01 Acceleration s Deceleration 9 67 s Acceleration 2 12 58 s Deceleration 2 13 45 s Code lt lt gt gt Quick Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Code lt lt Then use the parameter code index page 277 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 2 3 wire control 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 8 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive m The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu can be used for fast startup which is sufficient for the majority of applications The parameters in this menu
332. ted at state 0 since they can cause the motor to start immediately Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE Before turning on and configuring the drive ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown on the drive nameplate The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Separate control section power supply Only supply power to the power section the next time the drive is powered up when A The drive control section is powered independently of the power section P24 and OV terminals B Whenever an option card is added or replaced Power switching via line contactor A CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Avoid operating the contactor frequently premature ageing of the filter capacitors Cycle times lt 60 s may result in damage to the pre charge resistor Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage User adjustment and extension of functions The display unit and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages Return to factory settings is made easy by the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu see page 248 There are three types of parameter Display Values displayed by the drive Adjustment Can be changed durin
333. ted CANopen communication card Controller Inside card 122 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for I O profile IO configuration Selection of a command channel A command or an action can be assigned To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit By selecting e g this action will always be triggered by regardless of which command channel is switched By selecting e g C214 this action will always be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command channel is switched Toa switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit By selecting e g CD11 this action will be triggered by LI12 if the terminals channel is active C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active C211 if the integrated CANopen channel is active C311 if the communication card channel is active C441 if the Controller Inside card channel is active If the active channel is the graphic display terminal the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive Note CD14 and CD15 can only be used for switching between 2 networks They do not have equivalent logic inputs Communication Controller Inside Internal bit can be Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Gard switched CD00 LI2 1 C101
334. ted display terminal 106 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J LO3 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 106 delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true L1 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true L1 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control oLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 LO4 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 106 LO4 delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt B
335. ters configured are consistent in particular you should check that the required distance is possible This function does not replace the stop limit switch which remains necessary for safety reasons Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 1755855 12 2009 195 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting CE LI Stop FW limit sw O No nO Not assigned LH m LI6 Li6 LI7 Li7 to LI10 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted O LH 1 Li11 to LHA 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted O C101 c to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO O C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO B C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In I O profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs QJ Stop RV limit sw No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above LI Stop limit config Active high HIG The parameter can be accessed if at
336. the drive stopped No restrictions Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Ee Note If Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC we do not recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz in order to avoid speed instability CAUTION On ATV71e075N4 to U40N4 drives if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 11 Current Limitation 0 to 1 65 In 1 1 5 In 1 Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 61 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage N l Limit 2 value to 1 65 In 1 1 5 In 1 See page 188 The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 61 is less than 2 kHz
337. these tables relate to the following machines in particular Hoisting cranes overhead cranes gantries vertical hoisting translation slewing lifting platforms Elevators elevators in retrofit up to 1 2 m s Handling palletizers depalletizers conveyors roller tables Packing carton packers labeling machines Textiles weaving looms carding frames washing machines spinners drawing frames Wood automatic lathes saws milling High inertia centrifuges mixers unbalanced machines beam pumps presses Process Each machine has its own special features and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor exhaustive Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application In this case the application is identified by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages Motor control functions ratio 71 iii H a Sensorless flux vector control ral B a Flux vector control with sensor 7 B E E 2 point vector control 71 B il Open loop synchronous motor v Output frequency of up to 1600 Hz 69 Motor overvoltage limiting 83 Bi DC bus connection see User s Manual Motor fluxing using a logic input 154 Switching frequency of up to 16 kHz 82 iil Auto tuning 70 El H E 1755855 12 2009 11 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric
338. thorized at high speed The slowdown command is deleted on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation Abit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1 sensor changes continue to be monitored and saved 1755855 12 2009 193 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Example Positioning on a limit switch on rising edge T T 7 Reverse Reverse Forward Forward stop slowdown Reverse Forward slowdown stop Operation with short cams In this instance when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings the drive must initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown X Forward stop zone Forward stop 5 Operation with long cams In this instance there is no restriction which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory Forward slowdown zone n Forward slowdown MOQ A AON Forward stop zone Forward stop S S S S S 194 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7
339. ting HSt Hoisting O Use GEn General use m PID regul Pid PID regulation Network C nEt Communication bus Mast slave MSL Master slave A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of Macro configuration CFG press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 Customized macro Read only parameter only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified O Yes YES 1755855 12 2009 41 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM 1 Standard mot freq Factory setting 50Hz IEC 50 O 50Hz IEC 50 IEC 60Hz NEMA 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS below High speed HSP page 44 Freq threshold Ftd page 67 Rated motor freq FrS and Max frequency tFr 1 Input phase loss According to drive rating O Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus O Freewheel YES Fault with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss but if 2 or 3 phases disappe
340. tion in seconds minutes or hours length of time the motor has been switched on in seconds minutes or hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured in Hz can be accessed if the PID function has been configured Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Words generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Active configuration Config n 0 1 or 2 Set n 1 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 199 List of current alarms If an alarm is present appears List of secondary states In motor fluxing FLX In motor fluxing PTC1 alarm PtC1 Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm PtC2 Probe alarm 2 6 alarm PtC3 Ll6 PTC probe alarm Fast stop in prog FSt Fast stop in progress Current Th attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 66 Freq Th attained FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 67 Freq Th 2 attained F2A 214 frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 67 Freq
341. tive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the second current limitation is active I Limit 2 value 1 0 to 1 65 In 2 1 5 In 2 Second current limitation The parameter can be accessed if Current limit 2 LC2 is not No nO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 61 is less than 2 kHz Ee Note Ifthe setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Current Limitation First current limitation The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 61 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 224 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment dama
342. to No nO following auto tuning parameters are affected Cust stator R syn rSAS page 74 Cust stator resist rSA Idw IdA LFw LFA and T2w trA page 75 1 Output Ph rotation ABC AbC O ABC AbO Forward O ACB ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring Do not modify the Output Ph rotation PHr parameter when Motor control type Ctt page 71 FVC FUC The direction of rotation must be modified if required before or during the procedure to check the encoder page 78 when Motor control type Ctt is not FVC FUC o 70 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Motor control type SVC V UUC O SVC V UUC Open loop voltage flux vector control with automatic slip compensation according to the load This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58 It supports operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive if the motors are identical SVC I CUC Open loop current flux vector control This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in an open loop configuration It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive
343. tween 0 and High speed HSP 1 High speed 50 Hz Motor frequency at maximum reference can be set between Low speed LSP and Max frequency tFr The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating Mot therm current Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate 0 to 1000 40 1 Speed prop gain Speed loop proportional gain 11 Speed time integral 1 to 1000 Speed loop integral time constant 21 speed loop filter 0 to 100 Speed loop filter coefficient 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate 56 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Parameter settings for K speed loop filter SFC Speed prop gain SPG and Speed time integral SIt The following parameters can only be accessed in vector control profiles Motor control type Ctt page 71 SVC V SVC 1 CUC FVC FUC or Sync mot SYn and if ENA system EnA page 81 No nO The factory settings are suitable for most applications General case Setting for speed loop filter SFC 0 The regulator is an IP type with filtering of the speed reference for applications requiring
344. ubtracting input Multiplier 134 Synchronous motor 76 Torque limitation 185 Torque regulation 182 Traverse control 205 Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 234 276 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1755855 12 2009 Index of parameter codes Code Page 5 ES d E 2 2 tc O z z z 2 T Q o a E lt a 2 a 5 z lt 2 tc gt o 4 gt E 5 eels lee Se ems lt a m cw esq 52 TAS zu Bu Su Zo os c Sh 2 a tb ow M co 22 22 E 2 e a m a 2L 22 AIC 115 als AGC 115 ACe 55 139 152 179 ACC 44 55 137 143 HdLU 243 Hdd 243 52 94 l IE 94 A IIF 94 ALIS 94 A IIE 94 A 52 95 A 95 A 95 A 95 125 95 Alek 95 HI3H 52 96 IJE 96 A IJF 96 96 135 96 A 96 52 97 H IUE 97 97 A IHL 97 A 5 97 A 97 A IC I 98 177 215 535 ANDOA 243 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 277 Index of parameter cod
345. uency ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Motor th state att 15 Motor 1 thermal state attained External fault alarm EtF External fault alarm HSP attained FLA High speed attained Load slipping AnA Slipping alarm Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active In braking brS Drive braking DC bus loading dbL DC bus loading Forward MFrd Motor running forward Reverse MrrS Motor running in reverse High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd ttH page 66 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque Auto restart AUtO Automatic restart in progress Remote FtL Line mode control Auto tuning tUn Performing auto tuning Undervoltage USA Undervoltage alarm Cnfg 1 act CnF1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 66 Freq meter Alarm FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 67 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 51 www barr thorp com 1 2 MONITORING SUP With integrated display terminal This menu can be used to display the drive inputs states and internal values Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Can be us
346. up 1 Alarm Grp 2 AG2 Alarm group 2 Alarm Grp 3 AG3 Alarm group 3 PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 LI6 PTC al PLA 16 PTC probe alarm Ext fault al EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning slipping al AnA Slipping alarm Al C drv tHA Drive overheating Load mvt al bSA Braking speed alarm Brk cont al bCA Brake contact alarm Lim att SSA Torque limit alarm Trq ctrl al rtA Torque control alarm IGBT al tJA IGBT alarm Brake al 00A Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al APA Alarm generated by the Controller Inside card AI3 Al 4 20 AP3 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input AI3 Al4 Al 4 20 AP4 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Al4 Ready rdv Drive ready o El o Ej A Al E o 3 o m El El o o Al o o Ej E o m o isl o o o 1755855 12 2009 103 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 1 Delay time 0 to 60000 ms 1 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the info
347. us and in the Monitoring menu dtF Decrease ref speed Decrease in the base reference In certain cases the base reference has to be reduced as the reel increases in size The dtF value corresponds to time tbO Once this time has elapsed the reference continues to fall following the same ramp If low speed LSP is at 0 the speed reaches 0 Hz the drive stops and must be reset by a new run command If low speed LSP is not 0 the traverse control function continues to operate above LSP Motor speed Base reference L 4 With LSP 0 0 t tbO Motor speed Base reference n P Ce LE With LSP gt 0 f 206 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn e rtr Init traverse ctrl Reinitialize traverse control This command can be assigned to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit It resets the EbO alarm and the EbOt operating time to zero and reinitializes the reference to the base reference As long as rtr remains at 1 the traverse control function is disabled and the speed remains the same as the base reference This command is used primarily when changing reels Motor speed Base reference 1755855 12 2009 207 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com 1 7
348. utput or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters be accessed LO1 Lo1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 201 Analog output 1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 111 No nO Output contact fdbk No nO No nO Function inactive LH See the assignment conditions on page 124 The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 0 05 to 60 s A2 Delay to motor run Time delay for Motor control following the sending of a run command Output contactor fault monitoring if the feedback is assigned If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF2 fault mode This parameter can be accessed if Out contactor ass OCC is assigned or if Output contact fdbk rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor to 5 00 s Delay to open cont Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop This parameter can be accessed if Output contact fdbk rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the
349. wer or starting and stopping the drive Before servicing the variable speed drive Disconnect all power Place a DO NOT TURN ON label on the variable speed drive disconnect Lockthe disconnect in the open position Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present before servicing the drive WAIT 15 MINUTES to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge Then follow the DC bus voltage measurement procedure given in the Installation Manual to verify that the DC voltage is less than 42 V The drive LEDs are not accurate indicators of the absence of DC bus voltage Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 4 1755855 12 2009 This document provided by Barr Thorp Electric Co Inc 800 473 9123 www barr thorp com Documentation structure The following Altivar 71 technical documents are available on the Telemecanique website www telemecanique com as well as on the CD ROM supplied with the drive Installation Manual This bulletin contains complete mounting and wiring instructions Programming manual This describes the functions parameters and use of the drive terminal integrated display terminal and graphic display terminal The communication functions are not described in this manual
350. y terminal example file 2 of the graphic display terminal Put logic input LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 1 and leave logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 to 1 Download configuration 2 in a file of graphic display terminal example file 3 of the graphic display terminal Connect graphic display terminal to the drive B Put logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 and LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 0 10 Make a factory setting of the drive B 11 Download the configuration file 0 in the drive file 1 of graphic display terminal in this example 12 Put logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 to 1 and leave logic input LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 0 13 Download the configuration file 1 in the drive file 2 of graphic display terminal in this example 14 Put logic input LI 3 Configurations CnF2 to 1 and leave logic input LI 2 Configurations CnF1 to 1 15 Download the configuration file 2 in the drive file 3 of graphic display terminal in this example p Co OY D BON ES Nota Steps 6 7 14 et 15 are necessary only if MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function is used with configurations or motors Graphic display terminal Current configuration CANopen 2 Configurations CnF1 3 Configurations CnF2 CnF1 0 2 0 CnF1 1 2 0 CnF1 0 CnF2 1 ou CnF1 1 CnF2 1 Configuration 0 or motor 0 Configuration 1 or motor 1 Confi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Ladder Program Converter Operation Manual  1 Inhaltsverzeichnis  取扱説明書 - 温度センサ  A S9™ Wireless Module  De`Longhi - Dragon4 TRD4 0820  Ecoles à petit effectif : Rendre anonymes les codes saisis  Sony WALKMAN D-NF401 User's Manual  Manual de instalación  Vacon 10 Quick Guide.book  パンフレット  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file